JP2022015417A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: A special pattern includes a first special pattern that can be displayed variably when game media enters a first start pocket 120 and a second special pattern that can be displayed variably when game media enter second start pockets 140A, 140B, and variation display of the first special pattern and variation display of the second special pattern are executed in parallel.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine.

In a conventional game machine, when a game ball enters the first starting port, a random number for the first special symbol is acquired and stored, and when a random number for the first special symbol is stored, the first special symbol is correct or not. Judgment is executed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and stopped according to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, and a random number for the second special symbol is acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port. When the random number for the second special symbol is stored, the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is executed, and the second special symbol is changed and stopped according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. Has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-259639

However, in such a gaming machine, the second special symbol does not change and display from the time when the first special symbol changes to the stop display, so that the player's interest in the game is reduced. There was a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display game execution means that can variablely display a special symbol when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
It is possible to shift when the result of the variable display of the special symbol satisfies a specific condition, and a special gaming state is executed in which a predetermined profit can be given to the player by opening the variable winning device. Game state execution control means and
It is provided with a specific gaming state transition means that can be transitioned after the end of the special gaming state and can execute a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The special design is
The first special symbol that can be variablely displayed when the game medium wins in the first starting port,
Includes a second special symbol that can be variablely displayed when a game medium wins a prize at the second starting port.
The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel.
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.
The right gaming area is provided with a passing gate through which the gaming medium can pass.
The variable winning device can be put into the open state on condition that it has passed through the passing gate.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the front direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the forward direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko machine. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is (A) the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, and (B) the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (2) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (4) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start-up initial setting process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the electric power failure processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state monitoring processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "Prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the outline of the error in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the third pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example. Is the first open mode, (B) the open mode of the specific region is the second open mode, and (C) the open mode of the specific region is the third open mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. This is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) another example of the specific area. It is a figure which shows the case where the opening mode is the 1st opening mode, and (B) the case where the opening mode of a specific area is the 2nd opening mode. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the game flow in the 4th pachinko machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table selection table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the variation time when the time saving table number is selected according to the variation pattern table selection table shown in FIG. 86 in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern determination processing of a special symbol in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st modification of the variation pattern determination processing of a special symbol in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd modification of the variation pattern determination processing of the special symbol in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart for the effect of shortening the ceiling time in the fourth pachinko machine. This is an example of a time chart for a short rushing effect at the end of a hit in a fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart for directing the immediate mode in the fourth pachinko machine. This is an example of a time chart of the effect state transition effect in the immediate mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example by the effect state transition effect in the immediate continuous mode in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 97. This is another example of the time chart of the effect state transition effect in the immediate mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart of a series of result display effects of the charge mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example by the charge effect in the charge mode in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 101. This is a display example of the first effect zone determination effect in the charge mode of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 103. This is a display example of the second effect zone determination effect in the charge mode of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example by the 3rd effect zone determination effect in the charge mode in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 106. This is a first display example of the production of the fairy zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 108. This is a second display example of the production of the fairy zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 110. It is a third display example by the production of the fairy zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 112. It is a display example following FIG. 113. This is a fourth display example by directing the fairy zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 115. It is a fifth display example by the production of the fairy zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 117. It is a display example following FIG. 118. It is a display example by the production of the god attack zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a display example following FIG. 120. This is an example of a time chart of a pending continuous production in a fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as examples.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko gaming machine is in the front direction, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine is in the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from the front is in the left direction. The right side when the machine is viewed from the front is to the right, the upper side of the pachinko machine is upward, the lower side of the pachinko machine is downward, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is clockwise. , And vice versa, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called one-type pachinko gaming machines called digital pachinko machines. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Further, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and only one of them is variably displayed.

Further, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a so-called one-kind type gaming machine called a digital pachi and a two-kind type gaming machine called a wing mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be described in which only one of them is variably displayed without any problem. However, this does not mean that the pachinko gaming machine, which is a type 1 and type 2 mixer in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, is excluded.

In this specification, when the term "special symbol" is simply referred to, it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Further, the "variable display" as used in the present specification is a concept including both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner and "stop display" in which the symbol is stopped and displayed. Yes, the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as "derivative"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter, also referred to as "special symbol lottery") described later or the normal symbol hit determination The result of the process (hereinafter, also referred to as "ordinary symbol lottery") is confirmed. In addition, although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a mode in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not determined (for example, a temporarily stopped mode). However, such an embodiment is included in the above variable display. Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not fixed at this point, so that the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner again.

Further, in this specification, in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special). The case of (design) will be described as an example. However, the number of special symbols may be one for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

[1-1. Appearance composition]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a dish unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a gaming board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like are provided. Further, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the dish unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly described, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described. Details will be described later. The above parentheses indicate a reference drawing for a configuration (not shown in FIG. 1).

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the amusement park. A hinge (without reference numeral) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end portion of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as the axis.

The outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as the payout unit 8, the board unit 9, the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, and the dish unit 5, which will be described later, via the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the effect of production, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be increased in size. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 with, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a board unit 9 attached to the back surface side, and supports them.

The game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. Further, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, hinges (without reference numerals) are provided at the upper end portion, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion, respectively, and the upper end portion is provided. The glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the middle portion, and the dish unit 5 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, the glass door 4 and the dish unit 5 can be rotated forward integrally or individually with respect to the base door 3 with the hinge as the axis.

Further, the launcher 6 is fixedly attached to, for example, the lower right side of the surface side of the base door 3, and the speaker 32 (see FIG. 2) is fixedly attached to each of the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. There is. From the speaker 32, for example, voice effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, voice notifications, effect sounds such as error notification, and the like are output.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite to the hinge (that is, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member having an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear surface side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front in a state where the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be attached by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) pieces of glass with a gap between them, or a plurality of pieces of glass are unitized so as to have a gap with each other. You may. Further, when it is unitized, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of, for example, a transparent resin.

Further, at the lower part of the glass door 4, an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player is provided in order to receive the provision of the game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 described above is provided on the upper portion of the glass door 4. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for light emission effect and the like are arranged on the peripheral edge of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light emitting means for an effect such as notification by light or an effect of emitting light in various variations, but is not limited to the LED as long as such an effect of light emission can be executed, for example, a liquid crystal display, a lamp, or the like. May be.

(Dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unitization of the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52. The dish unit 5 is located in the lower front part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. As described above, the plate unit 5 is configured to be able to be rotated and opened / closed with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a clerk at the amusement park or the like can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, respectively, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper plate 51 is provided so that the game balls can be stored, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, an effect button 54, and the like. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 53 to the upper plate 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of a hit determination process of a special symbol. Further, the function of the operation unit 66 may also be used.

The lower plate 52 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 51. The lower plate 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 communicating with the upper plate 51, and the game ball overflowing from the upper plate 51 is paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower plate 52.

An opening (without reference numeral) that can be opened and closed by the operation of the player is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower plate 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower plate 52. In addition, when the so-called each machine counting system is provided in each machine, not only the ball box is not required, but also the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are stored again. It can also be used for games.

(Launcher)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located at the lower right front of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The launch device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a launch handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 61, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the launch handle 62 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. When operating the firing handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball.

The game ball launched from the launcher 6 arranged at the lower right of the plate unit 5 rolls in an arc shape along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) via the launch rail (not shown) for the game. It is launched into region 105 (see FIG. 4 below). The position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, and may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, and the versatility can be enhanced.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or one that projects an image using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an identification symbol for effect (for example, a decorative symbol) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, or the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is displayed. An effect image, an effect image during a big hit game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of variable display of a special symbol, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged so as to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 is attached to the base door 3. It may be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the plurality of display devices are used for the effect. The image may be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. A game ball is supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). A game ball is supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to, for example, the upper plate 51. Further, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Various control boards and the like are provided on the board unit 9.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 91 on which the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and the sub control on which the sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. The board 92, the payout / launch control board 93 on which the payout / launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of the game ball is mounted, and the power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see the figure below). A power supply board or the like on which (see 6) is mounted is provided on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub control board 92, the payout / emission control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but all of these boards are housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs on one board). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of the display control circuit 304, the voice control circuit 305, the LED control circuit 306, and the accessory control circuit 307 (all of which are described later with reference to FIG. 6), which will be described later, are separate substrates. Therefore, the sub control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 10 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 110, and a substantially center of the game area 105. The center accessory 115, the first starting port 120, the general winning opening 122, the passing gate unit 125, the special electric accessory unit 130, the second starting ports 140A and 140B, and the ordinary electric combination are arranged in the section. It includes an object unit 145, a small hit unit 150, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10. As described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, a guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. However, the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent. ..

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral). The game area 105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, in the gaming area 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the left side area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the right side area 107. The definitions of the left side region and the right side region are the same for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, which will be described later.

The game ball launched toward the game area 105 by the launching device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 106 or the right side area 107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 107.

In this specification, as an operation mode (striking method) of the launching handle 62, a striking method of launching a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as “left-handed striking”, and the launching method is to flow down the right side region 107. The method of firing a game ball is called "right-handed". In this way, it is possible for the player to hit the game ball toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

Further, in the center accessory 115, a warp entrance 117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in the lower front part of the display area of the display device 7. The stage 118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 but has not entered the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is detected. Random values for jackpot determination, symbol random values for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination for the first special symbol, and various random values such as random values for effect selection of the first special symbol) are extracted and extracted. Various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the first (1) The symbol random value of the special symbol, the reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values such as the effect selection random value of the first special symbol) are referred to as the start information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is referred to as holding, and the holding starting information of the first special symbol is also referred to as "holding ball of the first special symbol". The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General winning opening)
A plurality of general winning openings 122 are arranged in the lower left of the game area 105, and are arranged so that a left-struck game ball can be won (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). .. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side region 107, and is a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is a unit body integrated with 127 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected by the passing gate switch 127, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) is extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) is stored. The various stored data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 125 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left side region 106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 107.

Further, the passing gate 126 may be made to function as an opportunity to operate the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the transition condition from the non-big hit gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) to the big hit gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating that the jackpot is a big hit. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126, that is, the detection of the game ball by the passing gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6 described later) causes the accessory continuous operating device to operate. It may be activated to shift to the jackpot gaming state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is referred to as a starting passage, and various data related to the ordinary symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 (for example, a random value for hit determination of the ordinary symbol). Etc.) is called the start information of the normal symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is referred to as holding, and the holding starting information of the normal symbol is also referred to as "holding ball of the normal symbol".

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a big hit big winning opening 131 and a big hit big winning opening count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the big hit big winning opening 131. , Is a unit body integrated with the special electric accessory 133. The special electric accessory unit 130 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 105 and below the passage gate unit 125.

The jackpot 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot 131 for jackpots, a jackpot for jackpots where a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a center accessory 115. A big hit opening for a big hit may be placed at the top of the game.

Further, the big hit opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening to be done. When the winning of the game ball to the big hit big winning opening 131 is detected by the big hit big winning opening count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 131 for big hits is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for special electric power, is in an open state in which a game ball can be easily won (passed) to the big hit opening 131, and a game ball is won (passed) to the big hit opening 131. ) Is impossible or difficult to close, and the state can be transitioned to. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 131 for big hits is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot prize opening 131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in a gaming state.

(2nd starting port)
In this embodiment, the second starting port 140A and the second starting port 140B are arranged in the game area 105 as the second starting port, and both of these second starting ports 140A and 140B are right-struck. It is possible to win a game ball (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting opening 140A and / and the second starting opening 140B.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141A (see FIG. 6 described later). Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141B (see FIG. 6 described later). Regardless of which of the second starting openings 140A and 140B the game ball wins, it will trigger the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is detected by the second starting port switches 141A and 141B (see FIG. 6 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The started information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, there are two flow paths 107a and 107b on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball, which is hit to the right but does not win the big hit big winning opening 131. Is formed. A game ball that has been hit to the right and has flowed further toward the downstream side without winning a prize in the big hit opening 131 is placed in the upper flow path 107a or the lower flow path 107b by, for example, the branch nail 108 shown in FIG. It is sorted.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win a prize, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win a prize. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a win the second starting port 140A, for example, it is a configuration in which the winning of the second starting port 140A can hardly be expected. Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 107a may be configured to be able to win a prize with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth). The game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 107a but has not won a prize in the second starting port 140A is configured to be discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 178.

The second starting port 140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 107b can win a prize, and the details thereof will be described later in the description of the ordinary electric accessory unit 145.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is arranged on the lower flow path 107b side, and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects the winning of a game ball and an ordinary electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric shutter 147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the general electric shutter 147. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the shutter 147 for general electric use, can win (pass) the game ball to the second starting port 140B or is easily opened, and cannot win the game ball to the second starting port 140B. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member made of, for example, a pair of blade members, which is a so-called electric tulip, may be adopted. Further, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small hit unit)
The small hit unit 150 has a small hit large winning opening 151 and a small hit large winning opening count switch 152 for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the small hit large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 153 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction and a small hit solenoid 154 that can operate the small hit shutter 153.

The small hit shutter 153 can be moved forward and backward to allow or easily win (pass) a game ball to the small hit large winning opening 151, and the game to the small hit large winning opening 151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a ball.

If the game ball wins when the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit large winning opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6 described later). When a game ball is detected by the small hit large prize opening count switch 152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 151 for small hits is not limited to 10.

Further, the small hit unit 150 is a lower flow path 107b and is arranged on the downstream side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 145. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146, even if the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the lower flow path 107b is small. Since the second starting opening 140B provided on the upstream side is won before reaching the winning large winning opening 151, it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning large winning opening 151.

In this embodiment, the big hit opening 131 and the small hit big winning opening 151 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened when the big hit game control process is executed and the big winning opening are open. The large winning opening that is opened when the small hit game control process is executed may be the same large winning opening.

(Out mouth)
The out opening 178 is any of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 120, second starting opening 140A, 140B, big hit opening opening 131, general winning opening 122, etc.) that are fired toward the game area 105. The purpose is to eject the game balls that did not win the prize to the outside of the machine. The out port 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 145 and the small hit unit 150, and the game is played. The game ball flowing down the area 105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100 as described above. This back unit includes a production accessory group 58 such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later). The effect group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect effect group 58 function as the effect effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display unit 161, a normal symbol hold display unit 162, a first special symbol display unit 163, a second special symbol display unit 164, and a first special symbol hold display unit. A unit 165 and a hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol are provided.

(Ordinary symbol display)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, and includes the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the normal symbol") is satisfied, the variable display of the normal symbol in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b are alternately turned on and off is started. To. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the combination of turning on / off the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b is a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned on and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned off. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is lost, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b showing the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, and the normal electric shutter 147 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to the second starting port 140B. It becomes easy to win (pass) the game ball.

(Holding display for ordinary symbols)
When the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended, the hold display unit 162 for the normal symbol displays the number of variable displays of the reserved normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold of the normal symbol"). Therefore, it is provided with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of the normal symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, a random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) related to the normal symbol when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected is detected. It refers to the state from the extraction until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. It should be noted that the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not in the variable display and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 1, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is two, both the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols are lit. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 3, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol blinks and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol lights up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is 4, both the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol indicating the number of hold of the normal symbol is not limited to this.

(Special symbol display)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group 163a composed of eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a composed of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, the first special symbol display LED group 163a repeatedly turns on and off alternately or mutually. The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (for example, eight LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is specific. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the big hit game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, the second special symbol display LED group 164a repeatedly turns on and off alternately or mutually. The variable display of the second special symbol is started. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting / extinguishing of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (for example, eight LEDs) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is specific. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the big hit game state is determined.

(Holding display for special symbols)
When the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the reserved display unit for the special symbol displays the number of variable displays of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols"). The first special symbol hold display unit 165 and the second special symbol hold display unit 166 are provided.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of hold of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is held, and the hold display LED 165a, 165b for the first special symbol. To prepare for. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, the first special symbol) related to the first special symbol when the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected is detected. Various random values such as a random value for jackpot determination, a symbol random value for the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a random value for effect selection used when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol. It refers to the state from the extraction of (numerical value, etc.) to the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol. The starting conditions for the first special symbol will be described later.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of hold of the variable display of the first special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is one, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. When the number of hold of the first special symbol is 3, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 4, both the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol hold display unit 166 displays the number of holds of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the second special symbol hold display LED 166a, 166b. To prepare for. "The variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, the second) related to the second special symbol is detected when the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is detected. Random value for jackpot determination of special symbol, symbol random value for second special symbol, random value for reach determination of second special symbol, random value for effect selection used when determining variation pattern of second special symbol, etc. It refers to the state from the extraction of various random values, etc.) to the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol. The starting conditions for the second special symbol will be described later.

The hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol. For example, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is one, the holding display LED 166a for the second special symbol is turned on and the holding display LED 166b for the second special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol are lit. When the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 3, the holding display LED 166a for the second special symbol blinks and the holding display LED 166b for the second special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 4, both the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of holds of the second special symbol is not limited to this.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, a process executed when the power is turned on, a process related to a game operation, and the like, and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read / write memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main ROM 202, the main RAM 203, the initial reset circuit 204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 200 has an I / O port 205 connected so as to be communicable with various devices and the like, a command output port 206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, in the main control circuit 200, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol hold display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, and the first special symbol hold display unit 165 , The second special symbol hold display unit 166, the general electric solenoid 148, the special electric solenoid 135, the small hit solenoid 154, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170, the error notification monitor 172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. Further, in the error notification monitor 172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process are in progress. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a first start port switch 121, a second start port switch 141A, 141B, a passing gate switch 127, a big hit big prize opening count switch 132, a general winning opening switch 123, and a small hit big prize. The mouth count switch 152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I / O port 205.

Further, the main control circuit 200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. External terminal board 184, setting key 174 operated when changing or checking the set value if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, backup data stored in the main RAM 203 is stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In the present embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 of the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 400 and the power supply circuit 450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and image data. Is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 32. The voice control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the effect group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each accessory, an accessory data ROM in which an operation pattern is stored, and the like.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 400 launches a payout device 82 and a game ball capable of paying out the game balls. A launching device 6 capable of enabling the ball lending, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82, and controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 400 applies electric power to the launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the rotation operation of the launch handle 62 in the clockwise direction. It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / emission control circuit 400, and the like.

A power switch 95 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying the power required for the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, the game flow of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow of the first pachinko gaming machine. The game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow but a flow that can be grasped by appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball wins a prize in various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120 or the like), the gaming ball The payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process of a special symbol is executed based on a winning of a game ball to the start ports 120, 140A, 140B, and whether or not to shift to a big hit game state is determined. .. Further, in the ordinary symbol game, for example, a hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, and the ordinary electric accessory 146 is operated to win a winning opening (second in this embodiment). This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140B). In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, and for example, an operation unit such as a normal symbol game or an effect button 54 ( For example, a game or the like for directing using (see FIG. 1) is also included in the "game".

Further, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed). (Until the passage of time) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is derived and then controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the game is regarded as one special symbol game until the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. do.

When the stop display mode indicating the jackpot in the special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot jackpot 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and there is a possibility of winning the jackpot jackpot 131. It is relatively enhanced.

Further, when the stop display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 in the normal symbol game, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140B is relatively increased.

The game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game different from these may be able to be executed.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the special symbol game, the special symbol start winning process performed mainly when there is a prize (passage) to the first start port 120 or the second start ports 140A and 140B, and the special symbol start prize processing are performed. It includes a special symbol control process, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of a special symbol start condition.

When a game ball is won in the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A and 140B, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, jackpot determination random value, symbol random value, reach determination) from various counters for special symbols (for example, jackpot determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.) Random values for, and various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even while the special symbol control process is being executed.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the hit determination process of the special symbol for determining whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed with reference to the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter of the special symbol. After that, the stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter of the special symbol and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the probability change flag is on, the probability change control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, when the probability variation flag is off, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and when the probability variation flag is on, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively high probability. Is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" is referred to as a "big hit probability".

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the probability change control. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in the game state in which the probability change control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment, the high probability time saving game state or the high probability non-time saving game state). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a game state in which the probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time short game state).

Next, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the hit determination processing of the above-mentioned special symbol, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is referred to. (Variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the variable display control process of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, a display effect such as a decorative pattern or a character effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a sound effect such as a sound or a sound effect output from the speaker 32, etc. The effect control process is performed. The effect control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the variable display control process and the effect control process of the special symbol are completed, and when it is a big hit, the big hit game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the big hit game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and the game state transition control process to the non-big hit game state is performed. In this case, the gaming state shifts according to the type of jackpot. For example, when both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the big hit type, the state shifts to the probability change time reduction game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a small hit, a small hit game control process is performed.

Then, each time the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

If a game ball is awarded to the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start winning process is executed. Further, the start information of the special symbol extracted at the time of winning the game ball to the start ports 120, 140A, 140B (for example, the random value for jackpot determination, the symbol random value for the special symbol, the random value for reach determination, and the effect selection). Various data such as various random values such as random values) are held until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the starting information of the special symbol can be reserved up to a total of eight by the four starting information of the first special symbol and the four starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of start information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the start information of the first special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the second special symbol, or the start information of the second special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the first special symbol. You may do it.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, when the game ball is awarded (passed) to the starting openings 120, 140A, 140B between the time when the special symbol is started and the starting condition is satisfied. Based on the extracted start information, a look-ahead judgment is performed to determine a win (whether or not a "big hit" is won) or a fluctuation pattern prior to the hit judgment process of a special symbol, and a look-ahead judgment is performed based on the result of this look-ahead judgment. It may be provided with a directing function. The pre-reading determination may be performed before the start information extracted by winning the game ball to the start ports 120, 140A, 140B is reserved, or may be performed after the start information is reserved.

[1-3-2. Ordinary design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol start passing process performed mainly when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and the normal symbol start condition are satisfied. It includes ordinary symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the above.

When the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, start information of a normal symbol (for example, a random value for hit determination of a normal symbol) is extracted (acquired) from a hit determination counter for a normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination random value of the normal symbol extracted from the hit determination counter for the normal symbol, and determines whether or not to set it as "normal symbol hit". The hit determination process of the symbol is executed, and then the variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and the effect of performing a predetermined effect. Execute control processing. The effect control process may not be executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal hit symbol indicating "normal symbol hit" is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIG. 6). do. When it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived, the main CPU 201 executes the game control process for the normal symbol. In this game control process per normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) is activated, and the game is played to the winning opening (for example, in the present embodiment, for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4)). The ball can be won (passed) or easily opened. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol hit game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In the gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) in which the time reduction control is not executed, the probability that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control is a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the time when the time saving control is not executed, and a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the first prize opening) by operating the ordinary electric accessory 146. 2 The control in which at least one of the electric support controls for increasing the frequency of opening the starting port 140B) is performed corresponds to this. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

Then, each time the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

If the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. Further, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is reserved until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in the order in which it is held, and when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the variable display of the start information held first among the start information of the reserved normal symbol is displayed. Run.

In addition, various random values (for example, a random value for big hit determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, a random value for big hit determination of the second special symbol, The extraction method of the symbol random value of the second special symbol, the reach determination random value of the second special symbol, the hit determination random value of the normal symbol, etc.) is within a predetermined range by executing the program by the main CPU 201. A soft random number method that generates a random number value within the width) may be used, or a hard random number method that extracts a random number value from a counter in a random number generator in which a random number is updated at a predetermined cycle may be used.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time saving control is executed, a high probabilistic time saving game state in which both probabilistic change control and time saving control are executed, and time saving control in which probabilistic change control is executed. A high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state in which is not executed, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which probability variation control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 is in one of these gaming states. It is possible to advance the game in. However, the gaming state progressed by the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. It may not be done. For example, even if the game progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the game does not progress in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes a control for displaying the recommended striking method in, for example, a display area of the display device 7.

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 8 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 8, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6 are used by using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6), and the like. It can be set to one of the set values. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the set set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag is off (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-shortening game state in this embodiment) in which the probability change control is not executed is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the second special. Regardless of which of the symbol hit determination processes is executed, for example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about. It is 1/304, about 1/299 with setting 5, and about 1/294 with setting 6. Further, the jackpot probability in the gaming state in which the probability variation flag for which the probability variation control is executed is on (for example, in the high accuracy time-shortening gaming state and the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) is about 1/77 in setting 1, and setting 2 Is about 1/76, setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72. Although the small hit probability is not shown in FIG. 8, it may be different depending on the set value, or it may be a common probability in the settings 1 to 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for all the set values, but the jackpot probability is not limited to this, and is, for example, the jackpot probability common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, and common to the setting 3 and the setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of set values, such as the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability common to the setting 5 and the setting 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball is controlled to a big hit game state when a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, the winning probability in the specific winning opening may be different according to a set value. It is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 9 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 9 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 8 as an example.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot determination random acquired when the game ball wins in the first start opening 120 or the second start openings 140A and 140B. It is a table referred to when determining "big hit", "small hit" or "missing" by lottery based on numerical values. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the first special symbol are only "big hit" and "loss". On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "big hit", "small hit" and "loss". However, "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, it is determined to be "big hit" or "missing" based on the extracted random value for big hit determination. In the hit judgment table of the first special symbol, the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data are displayed for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag. The relationship between the above and the range (width) of the random value for jackpot determination determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data are defined.

In the present specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, it is determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "missing" based on the extracted random value for big hit determination. In the hit judgment table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data are displayed for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag. Relationship, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "small hit" and the corresponding small hit judgment value data, and the large hit judgment random value determined as "missing" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 0 to 204, it is determined as "big hit" and the winning determination is made. The value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is neither 0 to 204, it is determined to be "missing" and the determination value data is "missing". It is determined as "judgment value data".

Further, if the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 850, it is determined as "big hit" and the determination value data is "big hit". It is determined as "big hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is neither 0 to 850, it is determined to be "missing" and the determination value data is "missing". It is determined as "judgment value data".

Similarly, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 204, it is determined as "big hit" and the determination value data is It is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 205 to 22049, it is determined as "small hit" and the determination value data is It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is neither 0 to 22049, it is determined to be "missing", and the determination value data is "missing". It is determined as "judgment value data".

Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 850, it is determined as "big hit" and the determination value data is "big hit". It is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random value is any of 851 to 22695, it is determined as "small hit" and the determination value data is It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, if the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is neither 0 to 22695, it is determined as "missing", and the determination value data is "missing". It is determined as "judgment value data".

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first start opening 120 or the second start openings 140A and 140B and the above-mentioned winning determination value data. It is a table referred to when the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol specification command" are selected. The "hit time selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, and the "symbol specification command" is a command. This command is used to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 10, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. Be selected. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9, "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA3" is selected as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 29, "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 30 to 59, "z5" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, "z6" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, "z7" is used as the hit selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the special symbol is 0 to 99. Is selected, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol specification command.

When the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small hit game control process, for example, the small hit shutter 153 (see FIG. 6) is activated to allow or easily open the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4). A prize ball can be paid out by performing control of the state.

If the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "missing", the hit selection symbol command is not selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, and the symbol is specified. "ZA7" is selected as the command.

In this embodiment, the winning judgment value data is determined based on the extracted big hit judgment random value with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see FIG. 9), and then the special symbol judgment table (FIG. 9). 10) is referred to, and a so-called two-step lottery is performed in which a hit selection symbol command and a symbol designation command are determined based on a symbol random value of a special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination and the symbol random value of the special symbol, a so-called one-step lottery such as determining the winning of the special symbol, the winning selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be performed. good.

[1-4-4. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variation flag, the number of probability variation, and the value of the time reduction flag according to the hit selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. , And when determining the type of jackpot, such as the number of time reductions.

In the present specification, as in the case of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag is off when the value of the time saving flag is "0", and the time saving flag is turned on when the value of the time saving flag is "1".

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the big hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", and the time reduction flag is off. When the hit time selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time reduction flag is on, and the time reduction number is "10000". When the hit time selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "4", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time reduction flag is on, and the time reduction number is "10000". Further, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the probability variation flag is off, the time reduction flag is on, and the number of time reductions is "50".

If the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", the big hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", and the time reduction flag is off. When the hit time selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time reduction flag is on, and the time reduction number is "10000". Further, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is turned off, the time saving flag is turned on, and the time saving number is determined to be "50".

However, the type of jackpot shown in FIG. 11 is an example and is not limited to this. When the value of the probability change flag is determined to be "0", the probability change number is not determined, but the probability change number may be set to "0" in the sense that the probability change control is not executed.

The probability variation number "10000" is continuously executed until the probability variation control is determined to be a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot) in the hit determination process of the special symbol executed in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is the purpose that can be done.

[1-4-5. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 12 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine, which is (A) a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start, and (B) a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start. Is. In addition, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 12 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and the second special when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol.

In the normal gaming state in which left-handed strike is recommended, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 12 (A).

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which right-handed strike is recommended, that is, in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, for example, the variation of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the pattern table.

As shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (winning), the random value for reach determination, and the effect selection. Determined based on random value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made in place of or in addition to any of the above values based on other values or the like.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, compared with the case where the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start. , The expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is large. In particular, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long variation A to C). The display is done. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for an extremely short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, ultrafast fluctuation). ..

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different for each set value, for example, by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, and for example, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state or the low. In the time-saving short game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-5. Main control process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 39, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-5-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main process (main control main process) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. 13 to 16 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control main process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure signal is at the High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

When it is determined in S11 that the power failure signal is not at the High level (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this process, the backup clear switch 176 is turned on / off and the setting key 174 is turned on / off. That is, the on / off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Further, in this process, the game permission flag is set to off. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the start wait on the sub control circuit 300 side is performed. The start-up waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 1200.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start, the main CPU 201 may, for example, check the interrupt request signal, output the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initialize various sensors at predetermined timings. The output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before startup (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, it is determined whether the power failure is normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S14 that the power failure is not normal (NO in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S14 that the power is normally cut off (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then works. The checksum value of the area is collated (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the collation result is abnormal.

When it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, normal (when the determination in S17 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, a NO determination is made, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176. If either one is off, a YES judgment is made.

When it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. The processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (when the determination in S18 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). In this process, data for error display is set in the output port of the I / O port 205 to which the signal is output to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, the predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error display is performed. The main CPU 201 enters an endless loop after executing the process of S20.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the collation result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch Until it is determined that both of the 176 are on, the game cannot be executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating that the setting has been changed in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and the value indicating that the setting is changed is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current start state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the start control flag stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a process of clearing a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) is performed. It should be noted that this process is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs a startup initial setting process. In this process, the initial setting process according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is performed. The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt prohibition process. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power interruption process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. The details of the power interruption process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, the initial value random number of various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) is updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

When it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor aggregation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this processing is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

When it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the processing of S26 and performs the processing after S26.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt-prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

In this embodiment, in the main control main process, for example, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process section of S26 to S35) is performed before execution of various processes related to game control (for example, processes of S37 to S44) described later. Is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission / reception processing. In this process, a command transmission / reception process for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, a process related to the special symbol game is performed. The details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, a process related to a normal symbol game is performed. The details of this ordinary symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game operation display unit control process. In this process, display data to be output to each display unit of the LED unit 160 (for example, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, etc.) is set. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal board pulse signal control process, output data setting process, test firing test signal generation process, and the like are performed. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a state monitoring process. In this process, launch position determination process, game abnormality detection determination process, payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), the launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

[1-5-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

When it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When the second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clear (when S54 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. When the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

[1-5-3. Power failure processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the power interruption process performed in S27 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

When it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a checksum value calculation process. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in the corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203, respectively. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the XINT detection flag. Then, after executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs the RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-5-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area or the like of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71 in executing the special symbol control process. ..

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is held for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command of the main special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect. The main special symbol will be described in the sub-control process described later.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing for starting variable display based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S71.

When it is determined in S72 that the timing of the variable display start is not the second special symbol (when the determination in S72 is NO), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, the main CPU 201 processes. To S73. For example, NO is determined in S72 during the execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S72 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S73, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing for starting variable display based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S74.

When it is determined in S75 that the timing of the variable display start is not the first special symbol (when the determination in S75 is NO), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the main CPU 201 processes. To S76. For example, NO is determined in S75 during the execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S75 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S75 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

In S76, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S76, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S78.

In S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing for starting variable display based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S77.

When it is determined in S78 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO in S78), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S78 that the timing for starting the variable display is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S78 is YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S79, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing for starting variable display based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S80.

When it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process in the main control main process (FIGS. 13 to 13 to 13). (See FIG. 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (YES in S81), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S82) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display can be started without any execution, and when the process related to the first special symbol is not executed and the variable display can be started, the special symbol management process described later is given in the order of priority. Is being executed.

[1-5-5. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S73, S76, S79, and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

For example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed in S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the special symbol management process is S76 or S76 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S82, the first special symbol is the processing target.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 20 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S91).

When it is determined in S91 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S93 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S92.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S93 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S94 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S95 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S96 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This process of S98 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After completing the processing of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 201 returns the process to S74 when the special symbol management process is called in S73 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S77 when it is called in S76, and is called in S79. If so, the process is returned to S80, and if it is called in S82, the special symbol control process is also terminated.

[1-5-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variable display start processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S93 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S93 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S93 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S101).

When it is determined in S101 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S101 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S101 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is a YES determination (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, is ON (S102 is a NO determination). If), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

When it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S102 is NO), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol variable display. End the start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S102 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In the hit determination process of the special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed, and this process is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that it is a loss. After executing the process of S104, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S105.

In S105, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S104) of the special symbol (for example, a big hit, a small hit, or a loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, it is not necessary to determine the stop symbol when the hit determination process of the special symbol is loss. After executing the process of S105, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of the jackpot when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type is determined according to the "hit time selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S105) with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but there may be only one type of jackpot. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of big hits, a plurality of types of other hits (for example, small hits) may be provided, or a plurality of types of loss may be provided. good. After executing the process of S106, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S104) of the special symbol, the reach determination random value or / and the effect selection random value, etc. Accordingly, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which left-handed strike is recommended, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 12A), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined to the right. In the gaming state where hitting is recommended (for example, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variable pattern table of special symbols for high start (see FIG. 12 (B)) is used. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by reference. After executing the process of S107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S108.

In S108, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S107) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12). After executing the process of S108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S109.

In S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 20) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. (See S94) will be performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S110.

In S110, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S111.

In S111, the main CPU 201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S111, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and prohibits interrupts from the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S111) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S112)). It is preferable to do it within the section.

[1-5-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S94 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target. Further, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol of the processing target is simply referred to as a "special symbol", and the special symbol of the non-processing target is referred to as "the other special symbol".

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

When it is determined in S121 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded in S122.

When it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S123 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S123 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S95 in FIG. 20) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small hit.

When it is determined in S127 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a small hit (NO determination in S127), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S127 that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small hit (when the determination in S127 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S128.

In S128, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started or stopped during the execution of the small hit game control process. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a big hit.

When it is determined in S129 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a big hit (NO determination in S129), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and processes it. Is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S129 that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a big hit (when the determination in S129 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started during the execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S131.

In S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is in variable display (S131).

When it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not in variable display (NO determination in S131), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is in variable display (YES in S131), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test firing test signal will be output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S134.

In S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be processed (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol is hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S137, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. To. After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

As described above, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination processing of this special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 21). If the result of is a big hit and the other special symbol is in variable display, the process of forcibly losing the variable display of the other special symbol is performed.

[1-5-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

When it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S142, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S142 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S143. On the other hand, in S142, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S142 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small hit.

In S143, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating a loss (when the determination in S143 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S144.

In S144, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S143, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the small hit (when the determination in S143 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs a big hit game control process or a small hit game control process start setting process. In this process, a signal output to, for example, a hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After performing the processing of S145, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S146. The signal output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 is subjected to, for example, a process (S147) of setting an upper limit of the number of times of opening the large winning opening for opening (for example, the large winning opening 131 for big hits or the large winning opening 151 for small hits), and the external terminal board 184. Jackpot signal set processing (S148), processing to set the control status number of the special symbol to "3" (S149), game status specification parameter setting processing (S150), and transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command (S151). ) Etc. are performed. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149) and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 20). (See S96) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-5-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S144 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 24 and 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S161). When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this way, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S163) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S163, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing and ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-10. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S96 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this special winning opening opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S171).

When it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S171 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 loads the large winning opening opening count counter value. The big winning opening open count counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the round game executed in the big hit game state when the big hit game control process is executed, and when the small hit game control process is executed. , A counter that counts the number of times the small hit game control process is executed corresponds to this. The count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S173.

In S173, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 131 for big hits or the large winning opening 151 for small hits) is opened is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the big hit winning opening 131 is opened in the big hit gaming state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 11). 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened in the small hit game state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S173 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S173 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S174.

In S174, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S174) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 20) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. S98) will be performed. After executing the process of S174, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S175.

In S175, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S176). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S176, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

Returning to S173, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S173 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the large winning opening opening number counter value. After executing the process of S177, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big hit opening 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the big winning opening for opening when the big hit game control process is executed, and for the small hit when the small hit game control process is executed. The grand prize opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S178, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning opening (the big winning opening 131 for the big hit, the big winning opening 151 for the small hit) is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, and the big winning opening winning. The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of times the big winning opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the big hit game control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small hit big winning opening 151 is opened when the small hit game control process is executed. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round or the small hit game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened / closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S179, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S180.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1800 msec when the small hit game control process is executed. To. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at the time of executing the big hit game control process, and is set to, for example, 5 at the time of executing the small hit game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning a large prize is set to 10, for example, for both the large prize opening 131 for big hits and the large prize opening 151 for small hits. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the large winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S180, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) is performed. After executing the process of S180, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S181) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, the large winning opening opening control process (the large winning opening opening control process) is completed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process. (See S97 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S183, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-11. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S97 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S191).

When it is determined in S191 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S191 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hits, large winning opening 151 for small hits) is the maximum number of winnings. In this process, the large winning opening winning counter (for example, the large winning opening count switch 132 for big hits and the large winning opening count switch 152 for small hits) that counts the number of winning balls to the big winning opening is counted (see FIG. 6 for both). Etc.), it is determined whether or not the value counted is a value equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. The large winning opening winning counter value counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S192, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) is not the maximum winning number (when S192 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 Moves the process to S193.

On the other hand, in S192, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning openings (large winning opening 131 for big hits, large winning opening 151 for small hits) is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when the determination in S192 is YES). ), The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S194.

In S193, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hits, large winning opening 151 for small hits) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S179 in FIG. 27) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) has not elapsed (when the determination in S193 is NO), the main CPU 201 is determined to be a large winning opening. The mouth opening control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) has elapsed (when the determination in S193 is YES), the main CPU 201 is determined. The processing is transferred to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 closes the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hits, large winning opening 151 for small hits). After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S195) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again. Processing (see S96 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S197, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-12. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this jackpot end process is called in S98 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S98 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S201).

When it is determined in S201 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S201 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S201 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S202.

In S202, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.) are set or reset, and various counters (for example, probability change counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, large winning opening opening count counter, large winning opening) are set. The process of setting or resetting the value of the winning counter, etc.) is performed. The special symbol pause flag is reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S202). After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 26 is performed. After executing the process of S203, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-5-13. Ordinary symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 30 are control state numbers of ordinary symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S211 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S212.

In S212, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S212). After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S213 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S212.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display start processing of a normal symbol. The process of S213 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display end process of a normal symbol. The process of S214 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when terminating the variable display of the normal symbol. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process. The process of S215 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process of a derivation result of a normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss) is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S216.

In S216, the main CPU 201 normally performs an electric accessory opening process. The process of S216 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is performed in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S217.

In S217, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit termination process. The process of S217 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes the normal symbol per-end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In this embodiment, a random number for hit determination of a normal symbol is generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 255, and for example, 0 to 255 is used as the hit determination value data of the normal symbol. Since the normal symbol hit probability is determined by the number of normal symbol hit determination value data with respect to the total random number of the normal symbol hit determination random number, for example, the normal symbol hit probability is 255/256 in this embodiment. This normal symbol hit probability is the same or almost the same when the time saving control is executed and when the time saving control is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example 600 sec, in the game state where the time reduction control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example 1 sec, in the game state where the time reduction control is executed. Only executed. When the time saving control is executed in this way, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is increased.

[1-5-14. External masquerade interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the external masqueradable interrupt process executed by the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the external masqueradable interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S221). After executing the process of S221, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S222.

In S222, the main CPU 201 reads out the state of a predetermined input port of the I / O port 205. The above-mentioned predetermined input port has, for example, a set of states such as a power failure detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, and a solenoid monitoring sensor line. The input port to be used. After executing the process of S222, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure is detected.

When it is determined in S223 that the power failure is not detected (NO in S223), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S225. On the other hand, when it is determined in S223 that the power failure is detected (YES in S223), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that the power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S2224, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 201 performs a restoration process of the protection register saved in S221. After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external masquerade interrupt process.

[1-5-15. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 with an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S231).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S232). When it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, when the power failure is detected) (when the determination in S232 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246. On the other hand, when it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, when the power failure is not detected) (when the determination in S232 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I / O port 205 (S234), and shifts the process to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start control flag is a flag for determining which of the power-on recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like is the start state when the power is turned on. For example, in the case of recovery from power failure, it is determined that the game is permitted, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined that the game is not permitted.

The start control flag is composed of a combination of on / off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, the power is restored, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, the setting is changed, and the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S235 that the game is not permitted (NO in S235), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S236). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed in, for example, the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. The details of the setting control process (S236) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the setting control process (S236), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246.

When the game is not permitted (when S235 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 prohibits firing of the game ball from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), a specific switch (for example, setting key 174, backup clear switch 176). Etc.), it is preferable to disable various switches, prohibit payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S235 that the game is permitted (YES in S235), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16), and the count value of the interrupt counter is the interrupt in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238.

In S238, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S239. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S239, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to guarantee the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S240.

In S240, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S240, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 201 performs a winning information command setting process. In this process, transmission reservation processing of the effect control command (winning information command) is performed. After executing the process of S241, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S242.

In S242, the main CPU 201 performs an effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S242, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S243, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor control process. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) other than the work area (outside the area) in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up and, for example, when the RAM is cleared. Is stored in the area where the data is not cleared. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S243. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S231, and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[1-5-16. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the setting control process performed in S236 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S251).

When it is determined in S251 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the setting change process (S252). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the setting change process (S252), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S253 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (YES determination in S253), the main CPU 201 performs the setting confirmation process (S254). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the setting confirmation process (S254), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, when it is determined that the RAM is clear (NO in S253), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257. ..

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set value is displayed. After executing the process of S255, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S256.

In S256, the main CPU 201 performs an effect control command transmission process. In this process, the commands (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change processing (S252), setting confirmation processing (S254), or startup initial setting processing (S25) are subordinates. It is transmitted to the control circuit 300. After executing the process of S256, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), the WDT clear register address read process, the WDT clear process, and the WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is appropriately performed. Then, after the processing of S257, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control processing and returns the processing to the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-17. Setting change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the setting change process performed in S252 during the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. Note that FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (S261). This process is performed by reading out the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205.

When it is determined in S261 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (when the determination in S261 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263. On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (when the determination in S261 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs an update process within the range of the set value. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. However, in place of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch is provided to operate this setting switch. The set value may be changed by operation.

In S263, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S263).

When it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S263 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, when it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S263 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. As described above, when this first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S264), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-18. Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the setting confirmation process performed in S253 during the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. Note that FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S271). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S263 in the above-mentioned setting change process (see FIG. 34).

When it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S272). The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. As described above, when this second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S272), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-19. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first normal pre-game processing performed in S264 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as an initial setting process when the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 17) is neither a power failure recovery, a setting change, or a setting confirmation, that is, when the RAM is cleared. ..

The main CPU 201 first performs the initialization RAM setting process (S281). In this process, a clear process (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) of an area in the main RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as a “backup area”) in which backup data is stored at the time of power failure is performed. The area where the data is stored is not cleared by the performance display monitor control process (see S244 in FIG. 32). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data are stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. That is, the data backed up at the time of power failure is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S281), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) during the setting control process (see FIG. 33). When the process of S282 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal pre-game process. When this first normal pre-game processing is completed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set.

[1-5-20. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second normal pre-game processing performed in S272 during the setting confirmation processing (see FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of recovery from the power failure in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 17).

First, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at the time of recovery from power failure (S291). In this process, for example, the data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. The above-mentioned data is various information necessary for advancing the game, such as game state information, on / off state of a hit flag of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and information on the number of pending numbers. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this process, it is possible to start the game by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S292 after executing the RAM setting processing (S291) at the time of recovery from power failure.

In S292, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability change flag is on. This process is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S292 that the probability change flag is not on (when the determination in S292 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S292 that the probability change flag is ON (when the determination in S292 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from the power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, to turn on the probability change notification LED (not shown). This makes it possible to visually grasp whether or not the probability change flag is on when the power is restored. After executing the process of S293, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the power failure return command. The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) during the setting control process (see FIG. 33). When the process of S294 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal pre-game process.

[1-5-21. Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the switch input detection process performed in S240 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. Note that FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs an abnormal state monitoring process (S301). The details of this abnormal state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. This process is performed by reading out the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This process is performed by reading out the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205. Then, if the first start port switch 121 and / and the second start port switches 141A and 141B are on, the start information of the first special symbol and / and the hold addition command of the start information of the second special symbol are reserved for transmission. To. In this case, for example, when the look-ahead effect is executed, a specific hold addition command that can identify the hold on which the look-ahead effect is executed is transmitted. After executing the process of S303, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 performs a prize ball-related switch check process. This process is performed by reading out the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205. Then, if the prize ball-related switch is on, the prize ball payout command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-22. Abnormal condition monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the abnormal state monitoring process performed in S301 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38) will be described. Note that FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of an abnormal state monitoring process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs an abnormal state monitoring pre-processing (S311). In this process, abnormality detection information (for example, information of various sensors set in the input port of the I / O port 205 is updated. The main CPU 201 executes the process of S311 and then performs the process of S312. Move to.

In S312, the main CPU 201 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing. In this process, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality for each of the plurality of monitoring items that are the targets of the abnormality detection determination. After executing the process of S312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an induced magnetic field monitoring process. In this process, it is determined whether or not the induced magnetic field is detected, and if the induced magnetic field is detected, the induced magnetic field detection information flag is set to ON. Then, after the processing of S313, the main CPU 201 ends the abnormal state monitoring processing and returns the processing to the switch input detection processing (see FIG. 38).

[1-6. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S321). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like are performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 301 performs a read process of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read and performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the sub CPU 301 executes the command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S322 is analyzed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect mode determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including the specified information of the effect content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests for operating various effect devices (for example, drawing request, sound request, lamp). Requests, character requests, etc.) are generated. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the sub CPU 301 executes the drawing control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the sub CPU 301 executes voice control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a sound request to the voice control circuit 305. The voice control circuit 305 performs voice control for causing the speaker 32 to output voice based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S327.

In S327, the sub CPU 301 executes the LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S328.

In S328, the sub CPU 301 executes the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 is a complete or partial accessory that constitutes the effect accessory group 58 (see FIGS. 1, 2, and 6) based on the message (accessor request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. Drive control is performed to operate the effect drive motor (not shown). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, but the sub CPU 301 is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub-special symbol, and the effect control of the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state where left-handedness is recommended, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and the gaming state where right-handedness is recommended (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low accuracy). In the short-time game state), the second special symbol is regarded as the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol for the main special symbol, display effect of the character and the like, voice effect for the main special symbol, and the like. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the sub-special symbol is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced.

[1-7. Small hit rush]
In the first pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small hit rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

As described above, the first pachinko gaming machine is provided with a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the main CPU 201 is one of these gaming states. Control to one of the gaming states. As described above, since left-handed strike is recommended in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting port 120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is recommended, so the game ball can be won in the second starting openings 140A and 140B. The second special symbol game based on is mainly executed. When the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is used as the first starting opening, the first special symbol is in any of the normal gaming state, the high accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 151 is in another gaming state (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), It becomes a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passing gate 126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. Further, since the big hit big winning opening 131 is not opened unless the big hit game control process is executed, the frequency at which the second start opening 140B is opened in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. Low compared to the condition. Therefore, if the small hit large winning opening 151 is open, the game ball that is hit right and distributed to the lower flow path 107b can win the small hit large winning opening 151. When a game ball wins in the small hit large prize opening 151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. Further, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win a prize in the second starting port 140A. When a game ball wins in the second starting openings 140A and 140B, for example, as shown in the hit determination table (see FIG. 9) of a special symbol, a stop showing a small hit with a relatively high probability of one-third (approximate). Not only is the display mode derived, but the ultrafast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 12B), so that the display mode is small. The winning frequency of the game ball to the winning large winning opening 151 is increased as compared with other gaming states (for example, a normal gaming state, a high-probability short-time gaming state, and a low-probability short-time gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time saving gaming state and the low accuracy time saving gaming state), the second starting port 140B is opened by the electric support control, and is hit right. Most of the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 107b win the second starting port 140B. Therefore, even if the small hit large winning opening 151 is open, the expected value that the game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 107a wins a prize in the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the second starting port 140A is hit to the right and flows upward. Of the game balls distributed to the route 107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win a prize. As described above, in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

Further, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended, but if right-handed hitting is performed, a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is derived when the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 126. There is a possibility that the large winning opening 151 for small hits will be opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146 and the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 140B. However, in the normal gaming state, since the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 12 (A)), the game is tentatively set in the second starting ports 140A and 140B. Even if the ball wins, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long fluctuations A to C having an extremely long fluctuation time, and the frequency at which the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is used as the first starting opening, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the normal gaming state is set to, for example, 0 so as not to generate the actual profit of right-handed hitting. May be good.

In this embodiment, the game is configured to have a small hit rush in a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may be made in a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state in which a special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of a special symbol is executed without executing the electric support control.

[1-8. Signal output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer provided on each island (not shown)). The signal will be described. In this embodiment, the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described, but the signal from the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine may be input.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door / frame opening", "external information 1" to "external information 8". , "Prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these signals may be output. It may be configured so that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 41 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 41, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output from CN1, the signal of "door / frame opening" is output from CH2, and the signal of "external information 1" to CH10 is output from CH3 to CH10, respectively. Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The output conditions for the signal from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 41.

Next, an example of the timing chart of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec for every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 42 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of “prize ball information 1” among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 42, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big winning opening (the big winning opening 131 for big hits or the big winning opening 151 for small hits (see FIG. 4)), for example, 10 prizes are awarded. If the ball is paid out and the game ball wins at the starting port (first starting port 120 or second starting port 140A (see FIG. 4)), for example, three prize balls are paid out and the general winning opening. If a game ball wins in 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine for, for example, 120 msec, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 is set to "prize ball" at the timing when the payout detection switch of the tenth prize ball is turned on from the time of the previous output of the signal of "prize ball information 1", for example, for 120 msec. The signal of "Information 1" is output. It should be noted that outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is only an example, for example, the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is used. It may be between the time it is turned on and the time it is turned off. Further, the signal of "Prize ball information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out or output for 120 msec, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "Prize ball information 1" is only an example. Can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be described. The "security" signal is mainly a signal output when an error occurs.

FIG. 43 is a table showing an outline of an error in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200 and the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6). It is a table which shows the release moment, the output time of the signal of "security" (shown as "security signal" in FIG. 43), and remarks.

The outline of the error shown in FIG. 43 is an example, and only a part of them may be determined to be an error. For example, an error not shown in FIG. 43 is determined to be an error. You may do so. Those not shown in FIG. 43 but judged to be an error include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is turned on or off for a predetermined time or longer, and a big winning opening (big hit big hit). If there is an undischarged game ball inside the winning opening 131 or the large winning opening 151 for small hits (see Fig. 4), or if there is a prize in the large winning opening when the large winning opening is not opened, the large winning opening will be entered. It corresponds to a discharge abnormality error, a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time, and the like. Further, for example, a specific area is provided in the jackpot game control 131, and the probability variation control is executed after the jackpot game control is completed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control. In some cases, it is judged as an error even if the passage to a specific area is abnormal, or if the game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball inside the big winning opening 131 for big hits. It is preferable to configure it so as to do so.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) transmits a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection related execution executes the notification control according to the content of the error.

Hereinafter, control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both refer to FIG. 6) will be briefly described by taking as an example the case where an abnormal winning error for a big hit is generated.

As shown in FIG. 43, for example, if there is one winning detection after the initial power is turned on and before the first big hit big winning opening 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6). ) Determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the jackpot for jackpot, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the big winning opening for big hits is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, since the output time of the “security” signal is 12 seconds regardless of any error, the device outside the machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6)). (See) and the island computer (not shown) can grasp the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the content of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the machine that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. May be good.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives, for example, a fraud detection-related command indicating a jackpot abnormal winning error for a big hit, for example, all or part of the following notification control is executed, and the fraud detection-related command is received. After, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control shown below is terminated.
-Notification control for displaying, for example, the characters "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, the voice of "Abnormal winning error at the big winning opening" from the speaker (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from a speaker via a voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control in which the LED group 46 (both, for example, see FIG. 6) is fully lit in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

If, for example, there is a power failure before 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives the fraud detection-related command indicating the jackpot abnormal winning error during the execution of the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of the jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-mentioned Re-execute the notification control.

Next, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a table showing an example of a signal output according to a gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 44, the signal to be output is indicated by ◯, and the signal not to be output is indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the output signal is different depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, no signal is output during the normal gaming state (other than big hit / small hit, probable change / short time), and during the low probable time / short game state (other than big hit / small hit), "external information 3". And "External Information 7" are output, and the signals of "External Information 3", "External Information 5" and "External Information 7" are output during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). It is output, and the signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit).

In this way, by making the output signal different according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer) capable of receiving the signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) or an island computer (see FIG. 6). (Not shown)) makes it possible to grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine to which the external information is transmitted.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability change / time reduction). It is the same as the signal output to (other than). Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). The signal output during the small hit game control process (during the high accuracy time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the high accuracy time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit), and is the same as the signal output during the small hit game. The signal output during the control process (during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small hit game control process on a pachinko gaming machine to which external information is transmitted. It is not possible to know whether or not it is. However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small hit game control process different from the signal output when the small hit game control process is not in progress, the pachinko gaming machine of the external information transmission destination has a small hit. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by the device outside the machine that can receive the signal.

Further, during the low-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and during the small hit game control process (low accuracy) shown in FIG. 44. During the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state), the signals are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be assumed that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special figure shortening control are executed, or only the electric support control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control. If this is the case, the time saving control may be being executed, or if only the special figure shortening control is being executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control, the time saving control may be being executed.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. .. Therefore, the gaming board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from those of the first pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, in describing the second pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 46) (for example). , Functions, shapes, placement positions, etc. are common to the first pachinko gaming machines, such as signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 46) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island. The explanation of the above will be omitted as much as possible.

In describing the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine uses the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

By the way, as a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed. When the variable display of is suspended, for example, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. There is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequentially variable machine") in which the starting conditions are satisfied in the order of winning, including the first starting port and the second starting port.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in variable display, that it is not in the jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as the fact that the first special symbol is not displayed and the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the starting conditions for the second special symbol are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as that none of the above is in the variable display, that the jackpot game state is not present, and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended.

Further, in the sequentially variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in variable display, that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended. , The earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the start condition of the second special symbol is that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are satisfied. It is established when at least all of the conditions that the variable display is not in progress, the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, a priority variable machine will be described as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
The gaming board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The gaming board unit 1010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. A game area 1105 is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 1010 so that the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 45, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 1110, and a substantially center of the game area 1105. The center accessory 1115, the first starting port 1120, the general winning opening 1122, the passage gate unit 1125, the special electric accessory unit 1130, the second starting port 1140, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes 1145, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 1105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both have no reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 1105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 46 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 by the launching device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 1107.

Further, in the center accessory 1115, a warp entrance 1117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to the stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 1007. The stage 1118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 1120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 but has not entered the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 1120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize-winning mouth)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 1122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 1122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 1122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured to allow the game ball hit to the right to pass through, and the passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. It is a unit body integrated with 1127 (see FIG. 46 described later), is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected, the start information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The various data on hold are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 1125 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left side region 1106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 1107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 integrates the large winning opening 1131, the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of the game ball to the large winning opening 1131, and the special electric accessory 1133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right region 1107.

The large winning opening 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 1131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 1115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

The big winning opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. Is. When the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later) detects that a game ball has won a prize in the large prize opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 1131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 46 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, allows the game ball to win (pass) to the large winning opening 1131 or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot win (pass) to the large winning opening 1131. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. In the big hit game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the big hit game state is a game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 1131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a state.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 1140 is located in the left side region 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120). However, in the second starting port 1140, it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball hit to the left due to, for example, a game nail, and the game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 1140 has such a configuration, and for example, it may be provided in the right side region 1107 so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. Further, the second starting port 1140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 1140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later). When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 1140 is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140 is not limited to this.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged in the left side region 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) the game balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning opening, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball to the winning opening, and an ordinary electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a movable member for general electric power 1147, which is a so-called electric chew, and a solenoid for general electric power 1148 (see FIG. 46 described later) that operates the movable member for general electric power. The ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, the movable member 1147 for general electric use, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the second starting port 1140 or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 1140. It is configured to be able to transition to a possible or difficult closed state. In addition, instead of the so-called electric chew, which is a movable member for general electric power, a shutter capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction may be adopted.

(Out mouth)
The out port 1178 wins any of the various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 1120, the second starting opening 1140, the large winning opening 1131, the general winning opening 1122, etc.) that are launched toward the game area 1105. The purpose is to eject the missing game ball to the outside of the aircraft. The out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 1122, so that the game ball flowing down the game area 1105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. You may do it.

(Back unit)
Like the first pachinko gaming machine, the back unit (not shown) decorates the gaming board unit 1010 and is provided on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, and includes a production accessory group 1058 such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub control circuit 1300. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect effect group 1058 function as the effect effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. The control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine may be common to the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine, but this will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 46, the second pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 1200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 1300, a payout / launch control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 1203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 has an I / O port 1205 that is communicably connected to various devices and the like, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub control circuit 1300 so that various commands can be output. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, in the main control circuit 1200, the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol hold display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol hold display unit 1165, and the first 2 The hold display unit 1166 for special symbols, the solenoid 1148 for general electric power, the solenoid 1135 for special electric power, and the like are connected to each other. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 1170, the error notification monitor 1172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. while checking the settings. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the first start port switch 1121, the second start port switch 1141, the pass gate switch 1127, the count switch 1132, the general winning port switch 1123, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 1200 via the I / O port 1205.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 1186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 1184, a pachinko machine with a setting function, the setting key 1174 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation is connected. If it is a pachinko machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided. May be good.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the manager of the game hall (for example, a player) cannot easily touch the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 1174 or / and backs up. It also includes those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 1176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 1400 and the power supply circuit 1450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a voice control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 46, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 is a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A that converts image data as an image signal. Equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 1032. The voice control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 1301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the effect group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 and a game ball for paying out the game balls. A launching device 1006 for launching a ball, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082, and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / emission control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time saving control is executed, a high probabilistic time saving gaming state in which both probabilistic change control and time saving control are executed, and time saving control in which probabilistic change control is not executed but time saving control is performed. A low-probability time-saving gaming state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 1201 can advance the game in any of these gaming states.

In this embodiment, left-handed strike is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed strike is recommended in the high-accuracy time-shortened gaming state and the low-accuracy time-shortened gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes a control for displaying the recommended striking method in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 47 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol, that is, "big hit" or "big hit" based on the big hit determination random value acquired when the game ball wins the starting openings 1120 and 1140. This is a table that is referred to when determining "loss" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are only "big hits" and "losses", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first start port 1120 and / and the second start port When the game ball wins in 1140, it may be decided as another lottery target.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process of the special symbol, it is determined to be "big hit" or "missing" based on the extracted random numbers for big hit determination. In the hit determination table of the special symbol, the range of the random value for jackpot determination determined as "big hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol ( The relationship between the width) and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined. There is.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 0 to 204, it is regarded as "big hit". The judgment is made, and the judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is neither 0 to 204, it is determined as "missing" and the determination is made. The value data is determined as "loss determination value data".

Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 0 to 935, it is determined as "big hit". The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is neither 0 to 935, it is determined as "missing" and the determination is made. The value data is determined as "loss determination value data".

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 48 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a "hit selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins at the start ports 1120 and 1140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is the table that is referred to when selecting "Design" and "Design specification command". The "hit time selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, and the "symbol specification command" is a command. This command is used to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 48, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. Be selected. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 9, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA3" is selected as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 59, "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA5" is selected as the symbol specification command.

[2-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 49 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variation flag, the value of the time reduction flag, and the number of probability variations according to the hit time selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. , And when determining the type of jackpot, such as the number of time reductions.

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the big hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the probability change flag is "1", the number of probability changes is "10000", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "1". It is decided to be "10000". When the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "4", the value of the probability change flag is "1", the number of probability changes is "10000", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "1". It is decided to be "10000". When the hit time selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "50".

If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the big hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the probability change flag is "1", the number of probability changes is "10000", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "1". It is decided to be "10000". When the hit time selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "50".

However, the type of jackpot shown in FIG. 49 is an example and is not limited to this. As described above, when the value of the probability change flag is determined to be "0", the probability change number is not set, but the probability change number may be set to "0" in the sense that the probability change control is not executed. ..

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 1203 like the probability change flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the time saving control. In the case of a time-saving game state in which the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving game state or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in this embodiment), the time-saving flag is set to on and the time-saving control is not executed (for example, a gaming state). In this embodiment, the time saving flag is set to off in the normal gaming state).

The time reduction number is a variable display number of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time reduction control. That is, for example, when the number of time reductions is determined to be "50", if the special symbol is variably displayed 50 times without winning a big hit in this time reduction game state, the time reduction game state ends and the non-time reduction game ends. It shifts to a state (for example, a normal gaming state in this embodiment).

As described above, the probability variation number "10000" is controlled for probability variation until it is determined to be a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot) in the hit determination process of the special symbol executed in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The purpose is that it can be continuously executed. Similarly, the number of time reductions of "10000" means that the time reduction control can be continuously executed until the next big hit.

[2-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 50 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the second pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 50 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140. Determine the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 50, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random value for reach determination, or /. And, it is determined based on a random number value for effect selection and the like, but the determination is not limited to this, and may be determined based on another value or the like in place of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206. The sub CPU 1301 controls a display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and a sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

[2-4. Main control process]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 29, 59), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 in executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demo display effect. Since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine. There is no.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S1002 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S1002 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S1003 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S1004 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S1004 is YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process, S1005. Move to.

Returning to S1003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S1003 is YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process. Move to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the second pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 1120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 1140.

[2-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As for the processing target of the special symbol management processing, the second special symbol is the processing target when S1003 of the special symbol control processing is YES determination, and the first special symbol is the processing target when S1004 of the special symbol control processing is YES determination. It is a processing target.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 52 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S1011).

When it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S1011 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S1011 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1013. The main CPU 1201 performs the processing after S1013 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S1012.

In S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S1013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 53. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1014.

In S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S1014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1015.

In S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S1015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1016.

In S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S1016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1017.

In S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S1017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S1018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

After completing the processes of S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S1021).

When it is determined in S1021 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S1021 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S1021 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 47) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. In the hit determination process of the special symbol, first, a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and if it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, it is determined to be a loss. After executing the process of S1023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result (for example, big hit or loss) of the hit determination process (S1023) of the special symbol. In this process, the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 48) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1024, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of the jackpot when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type is determined according to the "hit time selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1024) with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 49). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but there may be only one type of jackpot. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of jackpots, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include the small hit, and a plurality of types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S1023) of the special symbol, the reach determination random value or / and the effect selection random value, etc. Accordingly, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. It should be noted that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different depending on the game state and the like. After executing the process of S1026, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S1026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50). After executing the process of S1027, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 52) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. (See S1014) will be performed. After executing the process of S1028, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1029.

In S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 are updated. After executing the process of S1029, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1030.

In S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S1030, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1031.

In S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S1030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S1031)) within the interrupt disabled section. It is preferable to do it in.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

When it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S1041 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S1041 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1015 in FIG. 52) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. After executing the process of S1042, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1043.

In S1043, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1043, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1044.

In S1044, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the remaining number of times. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

When it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S1051 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S1052, when it is determined that the special symbol that is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S1052 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 1186 (both see FIG. 45) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 1184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S1053, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 sets, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened (S1055), a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1056), and a control state number of the special symbol "3". Processing (S1057), game state specification parameter setting processing (S1058), transmission reservation processing (S1059) of the jackpot start display command, and the like are performed. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1057) and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 52). (See S1016) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

Returning to S1052, when it is determined in this S1052 that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S1052 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S1061). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it is possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S1061, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process (S1063) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1063, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52) as described above.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

When it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S1071 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1072, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S1073 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S1073 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1073 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S1073 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1077.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1074) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 52) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. (See S1018) will be performed. After executing the process of S1074, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S1076). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S1077, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1078.

In S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 1131, the number of winning balls at the time of winning the large winning opening 1131, and the like are set. .. The number of rounds is equivalent to the number of times the big winning opening 1131 is opened. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those whose big prize openings are opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened / closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1078, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1079.

In S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 1131 is performed. After executing the process of S1079, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1080.

In S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1080) and switching the control state number, the large winning opening opening control process (the large winning opening opening control process) is completed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process. (See S1017 in FIG. 52) will be performed. After executing the process of S1080, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1081.

In S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1081, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-8. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

When it is determined in S1091 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S1091 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S1091 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 45) for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening 1131 is equal to or more than the maximum number of winnings. The value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

When it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening 1131 is not equal to or more than the maximum winning number (NO in S1092), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when the determination in S1092 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1094.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S1078 in FIG. 57) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has not elapsed (NO in S1093), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has elapsed (when the determination in S1093 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

In S1094, the main CPU 1201 performs the closing setting process of the large winning opening 1131. After executing the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1095.

In S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1095) and switching the control state number, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process. Processing (see S1016 in FIG. 52) will be performed. After executing the process of S1095, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1096.

In S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1096, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-9. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S1101 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed. After executing the process of S1103, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52), and returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3. Third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 and type 2 mixing machine, and the first route and the second route are used as routes until the jackpot gaming state is controlled. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a hit for opening the accessory", and the game ball that has entered the opened V attacker is V. This is the case when the V winning opening in the attacker is won.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a sequentially variable machine that does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but executes variable display in the order of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned priority variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the third pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 61) (for example). , Functions, shapes, placement positions, etc. are common to the first pachinko gaming machines, such as signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island. The explanation of the above will be omitted as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine uses the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 60, the gaming board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. The gaming board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 60 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. On the front surface of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 60, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially center of the game area 2105. The center accessory 2115, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the general winning opening 2122, the passing gate unit 2125, the special electric accessory unit 2130, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes a 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an out port 2178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, a guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 2105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both have no reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launcher 2006 (see FIG. 61 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 by the launcher 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region 2107.

Further, in the center accessory 2115, a warp entrance 2117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to the stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. The stage 2118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 2120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 but has not entered the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 2120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting port 2140.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize-winning mouth)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2122 is replaced with the above-mentioned general winning opening 2122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured to allow the game ball hit to the right to pass through, and the passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. It is a unit body integrated with 2127 (see FIG. 61 described later), is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the start information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The various data on hold are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate unit 2125, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left side region 2106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates with. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right region 2107.

The large winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

The big winning opening 2131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit gaming state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Is. When the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 2131 is detected by the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 61 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the large winning opening 2131, and it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball to the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be closed and transitionable to. The big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above. When the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the big hit game state after passing through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds. It is a game state that made it possible.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 has a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game ball wins (passes), a switch for detecting the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, and an ordinary electric. It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right side region 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a general electric shutter 2147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 61 described later) for operating the general electric shutter 2147. The ordinary electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, is capable of winning (passing) a game ball to the second starting port 2140 or is easily opened, and it is impossible to win a game ball to the second starting port 2140. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 2147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be adopted.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided on the downstream side of the passing gate 2126 in the right side region 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening / closing winning opening 2151 opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening / closing the opening / closing winning opening 2151, and the V attacker 2152. The V attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning opening 2155 through which the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 can pass, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 are V. The V winning opening switch 2156 that detects that the game ball has entered (passed) into the winning opening 2155, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning opening 2150 from the open / close winning opening 2151 did not enter the V winning opening 2155. A loss opening 2157 through which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning It is provided with a locking member 2160 capable of holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided on the upstream side of the passing gate 2126, or may be provided on the left side region 2106.

The V-attacker 2152 is a member along an arc, and is in a closed state in which the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is always closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the stop display mode indicating that it is a "feature opening hit" described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the solenoid for V attacker 2154 ( The operation of FIG. 61, which will be described later) causes the V-attacker 2152 to operate, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is operated once, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened, for example, by 1800 msec. Then, while the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

The mode for opening the V-attacker 2152 when the stop display mode indicating "per opening of the accessory" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, 900 msec may be opened twice. A predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be closed based on the entry into the inside of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. When the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and functions of the main CPU 2201. Add the value of the V attacker winning counter. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open / close the winning even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that can open the opening / closing winning opening 2151 has not passed. The mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155. That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the jackpot gaming state via the second route described above.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152. That is, it is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled via the first route, the round game in which the big winning opening 2131 is changed from the closed state to the open state is executed, whereas the second round game is executed. When controlled to the jackpot game state via the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is changed from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the player is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but for example, a big prize opening is made from the middle of the round game. You may perform a round game that shifts the 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning opening and the big hit game The attackers released in the state may be one by one. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that "the accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is placed in the V winning opening provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. Upon entering, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit gaming state via the second route).

The loss opening 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 2155 enters (passes). The game ball that has passed through the loss opening 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. If all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and the game balls do not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V-shutter 2158 has a closing mode in which the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to pass through the V-winning opening 2155 due to the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61 described later), and the game to the V-winning opening 2155. A constant operation is always performed between the opening mode in which the ball can pass (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly performs a constant operation in a cycle (cycle) of 7000 msec in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157. Even when a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157.

Further, after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed from the operation of the V-attacker 2152, the locking member 2160 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of the locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155. If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. The game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 without providing the locking member 2160.

(Out mouth)
The out port 2178 is of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 2120, second starting opening 2140, large winning opening 2131, V winning device 2150, general winning opening 2122, etc.) fired toward the game area 2105. The purpose is to eject the game balls that have not won or entered any of them to the outside of the aircraft. The out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 2178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting port 2140. The game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the gaming board unit 2010 like the first pachinko gaming machine, and is provided on the rear side of the gaming panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and includes a production accessory group 2058 such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub control circuit 2300. Of these production accessory group 2058, at least one accessory or the effect accessory component constituting the accessory functions as an effectable accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. The control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine, but this will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 61, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 2300, a payout / launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 2203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I / O port 2205 that is communicably connected to various devices and the like, and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub control circuit 2300 so that various commands can be output. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, in the main control circuit 2200, the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol hold display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol hold display unit 2165, and the first 2 The hold display unit for special symbols 2166, the solenoid for general electric power 2148, the solenoid for special electric power 2135, the solenoid for V attacker 2154, the solenoid for V shutter 2159 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 2170, the error notification monitor 2172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 2200. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. while checking the settings. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first start port switch 2121, a second start port switch 2141, a passing gate switch 2127, a large winning opening count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning opening switch 2156, and general. The winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 2200 via the I / O port 2205.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 2186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 2184, a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 are stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation is connected. If it is a pachinko machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided. May be good.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the manager of the game hall (for example, a player) cannot easily touch the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 2174 or / and backs up. It also includes those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 2176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 2400 and the power supply circuit 2450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a voice control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 61, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A that converts image data as an image signal. Equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, the image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 2032. The voice control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the effect group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 and a game ball for paying out the game balls. A launching device 2006 for launching a ball, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082, and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a lending ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / emission control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation control is not executed. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which the time saving control is not executed and a time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed strike is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed strike is recommended in the short-time gaming state. The sub CPU 2301 executes a control for displaying the recommended striking method in the display area of the display device 2007, for example.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 62 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120, the lottery result is ". It is decided as "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the lottery result is "big hit" or "combination" in the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random value for big hit determination of the second special symbol. It is decided to "per opening the object".

It is not essential that the "feature opening hit" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "feature opening hit". It is preferable that the determination is made only with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential that the hit determination process of the second special symbol is not determined as "missing", but if it is determined as "missing", it is "hit for opening the character". It may be higher than the probability determined by, or it may be lower than the probability determined by "per opening of the character".

In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, "big hit" or "loss" is used as the data used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first start port 2120. The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for jackpot determination determined in 1 and the corresponding determination value data (“big hit determination value data”, “loss determination value data”) is defined. Further, as the data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140, the random value for the jackpot determination determined as "big hit" or "feature open hit" is used. The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data”, “feature opening hit judgment value data”) is defined.

It should be noted that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function of changing the jackpot probability determined as "big hit", but this is not essential, and the probability change flag is turned on according to the type of jackpot, for example. It may be set so that the jackpot probability can be increased.

Further, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random value of the jackpot determination random value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned jackpot determination random value is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability and / and the accessory opening hit probability to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus opening hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus opening hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. May be.

Further, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and the accessory opening hit probability according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of shortening of time may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the winning probability of opening the accessory, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening the time reduction. By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 63 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a "hit time selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the start ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is the table that is referred to when selecting "Design" and "Design specification command". The "hit time selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, and the "symbol specification command" is a command. This command is used to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 63, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. Be selected. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA2" is selected as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 95, "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the special symbol is 96 or 97, "z5" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the special symbol is 98 or 99, "z6" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 64 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table is a jackpot such as the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the time reduction flag, the number of time reductions, etc., according to the hit selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. It is referred to when determining the type of. The remarks column in FIG. 64 is described for convenience so that it can be easily understood.

As shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state is "15", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the big hit. The number of time reductions after the game state is determined to be "4".

In the case of the hit selection symbol commands "z4", "z5", and "z6", when the judgment value data is "the winning judgment value data for opening the accessory" (that is, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the accessory. It is a hit selection symbol command (in the case of an open hit), and the V attacker 2152 is opened by the opening hit of the accessory, and the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is detected, so that the game is controlled to the big hit game state. The number of rounds and the number of time reductions are specified. Therefore, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the game is not controlled to the big hit game state, the big hit game state is entered. It is not controlled, and the number of time reductions specified in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 is not set.

[3-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 65 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the third pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 65 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determine the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. 2 Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 65, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the main CPU 2201 wins the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2120 ( It is determined based on the effect selection random value acquired at the time of passing).

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "missing", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, and the first starting port 2120. ) Is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value obtained at the time of. Since right-handed hitting is recommended in the short-time game state, it is considered that the game ball rarely wins in the first starting port 2120.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 obtains the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 sets the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value acquired when the game ball wins in 2140.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time. Is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation effect, for example, 600,000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", the game ball basically does not win (pass) the second starting port 2140, but an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 should be used. Even if the game ball wins a prize, it is done in this way in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantager, but it is not always necessary to do so.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

[3-4. Main control process]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 29, 76), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 in executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demo display effect. Since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine. There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2002 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2004 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2004 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As for the processing target of the special symbol management processing, the second special symbol is the processing target when S2003 of the special symbol control processing is YES determination, and the first special symbol is the processing target when S2004 of the special symbol control processing is YES determination. It is a processing target.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 67 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

When it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2011 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2011 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. Then, after executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the processing after S2013 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the V-winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening control process. This process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. This process of S2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S2020 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the special symbol variable display start processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

If the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing called in S2013 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 68, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S2021).

When it is determined in S2021 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S2021 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 62) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a bonus opening hit. In the hit determination process of the first special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit, it is determined to be a loss. Similarly, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, it is determined that it is a bonus open hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol (for example, a big hit, an opening hit of an accessory, or a loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 63) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of jackpot when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a jackpot or an accessory open hit. In this process, the jackpot type is determined according to the "hit time selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64). The type of big hit determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, the opening of the accessory is that the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the opening of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and bonus opening hits, but there may be only one type of jackpot or bonus opening hits. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of big hits and / and hits for opening the accessory, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, the random value for reach determination and / and the effect selection. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value and the like. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S2026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65). After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 67) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. It will be. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S2030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt disabled section. It is preferable to do it in.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

When it is determined in S2041 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S2041 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the processing in the special symbol management processing (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 67) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. Will be. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of executions of the special symbol game). For example, the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

If this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

When it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S2051 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 67). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S2051 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S2052 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S2052 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the opening hit of the accessory, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the loss, NO is determined in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 2186 (both refer to FIG. 61) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 2131 is opened (S2055), a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and a control state number of the special symbol "5". Processing (S2057), game state specification parameter setting processing (S2058), transmission reservation processing (S2059) of the jackpot start display command, and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a bonus opening hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a bonus opening hit.

In S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a hit of opening the accessory, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating a loss (when the determination in S2060 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the accessory opening hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit (when the determination in S2060 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per opening of the accessory. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal for opening an accessory) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened set in this process is, for example, once. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a signal setting process (S2063) for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 2184, a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and a game state specification parameter setting process (S2065). ), And the transmission reservation process (S2066) of the start display command for opening the accessory is performed. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 67) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 70) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game end process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S2071). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is completed, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process (S2073) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67) as described above.

[3-4-7. V prize device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

When it is determined in S2081 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S2081 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time, the maximum number of times of opening, and the like as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to open a maximum of 1800 msec only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, a maximum of 900 msec may be opened twice at a maximum. The first time may be opened, for example, up to 600 msec, and the second time may be opened, for example, up to 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed the specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each opening of the accessory, and among these multiple opening patterns, for example, one of them is based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. It may be set to one open pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device open / close control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". By performing the process (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" in this way, after the completion of the V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 67). Will be done. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the V winning device opening display command. The V-winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-8. V winning device open control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

When it is determined in S2091 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S2091 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 61), which counts the number of winnings of the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is equal to or more than the maximum number of winnings. Will be done. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or more than the maximum winning number (NO in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2092 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 72) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not it has been detected by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. The above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. For example, the game ball by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set within the specified time after the locking is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that the V prize has been detected (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a game control start setting process per V. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per V) output to the hall computer 2186 (both see FIG. 61) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the game control per V is executed, for example, a round game of 15 rounds is executed as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64), so that the player has executed the jackpot game control process. As in the case, you can win a large number of prize balls. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-per game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and referred to, but the V-per game control may also be referred to as the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the winning of the winning combination is processed as the first round game. That is, the game control per V executed by the determination that the V winning detection has been made (S2095 is determined to be YES) is started from the second round game. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 has, for example, a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S2099), and a process of setting a signal per V to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state specification parameter setting process (S2102), the transmission reservation process of the V-hit start display command (S2103), and the like. By performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2095, when it is determined that there is no V winning detection in this S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

When it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the big hit end process (see S2020 of FIG. 67) is performed after the end of the large winning opening opening preparation process. It will be. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived (S2052 in FIG. 70 is determined to be YES). In the case of the big hit game control process, the big winning opening 2131 is selected as the big winning opening to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, the stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (S2060 in FIG. 70 is determined to be YES), and the V prize is detected (FIG. In the case of the game control per V started by (S2095 of 73 is determined to be YES), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the large winning prize. The number of prize balls and the like at the time of winning the prize to the mouth 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is set. The number of rounds of opening the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform control for managing the number of rounds and control for managing the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

The above-mentioned "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the opening large winning opening among the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". By performing the process (S2121) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 67). Will be done. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-10. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

When it is determined in S2131 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61) for counting the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 2131 or the V attacker count switch for counting the number of entering the game ball into the inside of the V winning opening 2150. It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 61) is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is YES), the main CPU 2201 processes the process in S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 74) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. , Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 closes the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed again. See) will be done. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-11. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "7" (when the determination in S2141 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when the determination in S2141 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[4. Expansion example]
Hereinafter, an extended example common to the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described above will be described. Since the reference numerals attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the following description describes specific pachinko gaming machines (particularly the third pachinko gaming machine). Unless the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine), the reference numerals are omitted.

[4-1. Extended example of probabilistic control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on according to the type of jackpot, and when the probability variation flag is set to on, the number of probability variations is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be used.

For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process, for example, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the jackpot has passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific region, the jackpot is determined. It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets the probability change flag on at the end of the game control process. In the above specific area, for example, the movable member operates in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, so that the game ball can pass through or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to displace to a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variable machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit When the result is a big hit, the ease of passing the game ball to the above specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 77 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) specified. The figure which shows the case where the opening mode of a region is a 1st opening mode, (B) the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of a specific area is a 3rd opening mode. Is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area. In the example shown in FIG. 77, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that FIG. 77 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time after being short-opened, but the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the large winning opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the large winning opening to the end of the long opening of the large winning opening. ing. Therefore, it is extremely easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is set on very easily at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), in the third opening mode, a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started (both of these two times are short time). ), The specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot can pass through the specific area in either the first open mode or the second open mode. It is also difficult compared to. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag is turned on at the end of the big hit game control process. It is set.

Note that FIG. 77 is an example of an opening mode of a specific area in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the big winning opening is easily passed through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. , An example of providing two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific region in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot is easy to pass through the specific region is limited to two modes. However, only one aspect may be used, or three or more modes may be used.

Further, in FIG. 77, an opening mode of a specific area in which it is difficult to pass through a specific area even if only one of a plurality of game balls winning a prize in the big winning opening is being executed during the jackpot game control process. As an example of the above, an example of providing a third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the big hit game control process, the number of open modes of the specific area where it is difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is 1. The mode is not limited to this, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 78 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 78, when the winning determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit), the first special symbol and the first 2 The hit selection symbol command of the special symbol is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, for example, in the hit selection symbol command, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. It is selected and "z2" is selected with a selectivity of 50%. When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, for example, in the hit selection symbol command, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. It is selected and "z5" is selected with a selectivity of 35%.

FIG. 79 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 79, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (3R normal big hit A) of the third opening mode. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit A) of the third opening mode. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot of the first opening mode (10R probability variation jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit B) of the third opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot B) of the first opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 77 to 79 above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 3R normal big hit A with a selectivity of 40%, and 10%. The selectivity of is determined to be 10R normal jackpot A, and the selectivity of 50% is determined to be 10R probability variation jackpot A. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selectivity of 15% and 10R probability variation jackpot B with a selectivity of 50%. , 35 is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot C. In this way, depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability change flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to make the probability of being set on different.

In a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which the specific area is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (C), and is described later, for example. As shown in FIG. 80, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening.

FIG. 80 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning). (Example) in which the opening mode is controlled based on the winning of the mouth, (A) the opening mode of the specific region is the first opening mode, and (B) the opening mode of the specific region is the second. It is a figure which shows the case of an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 80 (A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening count is obtained. When the switch detects the winning of the first game ball, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the big winning opening is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area is open. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the specific area is until the winning opening is closed. Does not open, but remains closed. Therefore, it is more difficult than the first opening mode to pass through a specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls that have won a prize in the big prize opening is executed during the execution of the big hit game control. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability changes at the end of the jackpot game control process. The flag is set to on.

In the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, an example in which the probability change flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. If the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a type 1 / type 2 mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. Although the example to be provided has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an opening mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is performed in both the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. An example that can be determined in the difficult third aspect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one. The game ball may be configured to be determined only in an aspect (first aspect or second aspect) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through a specific area.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice at a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has been open for a short time (both for a short time), but if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be opened once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, the closing of a specific area is closed according to the passage of a predetermined opening time or the end of a round in which the specific area is opened, or is closed according to a specified number of large winning openings or winning a prize in a specific area. It may be controlled to do so. Further, one or a plurality of conditions for closing may be combined.

Further, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, the high probability time-shortening game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are set to a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is repeatedly executed alternately until it reaches the limit. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. It is controlled to (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the number of loops is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of limiters may be a fixed number, for example, may be determined according to a symbol random value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting machine, the number of limiters may be different depending on the set value.

In the above, the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state. , The gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached. In particular, it is effective when it is a type 1 type 2 type mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability change machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the probability change control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth big hit game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined number of limiters has been reached. The game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, the game does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, but the game is played in the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. The same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process.

Further, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the probabilistic change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-shortening game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which the probability variation control is not executed when the special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “ST number”) may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may be different depending on the set value. Further, for example, it may be a so-called fall-type gaming machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the probability variation control is completed based on the result of the fall lottery. For example, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area during the big hit gaming state. It may be a so-called V probability variation type gaming machine in which probability variation control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[4-2. Extended example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control may be executed after the big hit game control process is completed. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random value among the random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening (for example, for special symbol hit determination). A random value, a special symbol symbol random value, etc.) may be used to perform a time reduction winning determination process for determining whether or not to execute the time reduction control, in addition to the special symbol hit determination process. When the time saving hit judgment is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, for example, the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a specific symbol disorder. If it is a numerical value, it can be determined as a "time reduction hit" in which the time reduction control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning determination process may be performed.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is performed separately from the special symbol hit determination processing, the time saving winning determination processing may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame.

Further, when the above-mentioned time-saving winning determination processing is performed, a random number for determining the time-saving winning, which is exclusively used for the time-saving winning determination processing, is generated in a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving winning is applied based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time-saving winning determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning.

Further, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball at the starting opening, and it is not essential to extract it in other areas (for example, general winning opening, small hit winning opening, etc.). It may be extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening, etc.). Further, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination processing is provided, and a random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted based on, for example, that the game ball has passed through this dedicated area. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time saving winning determination process and the special symbol hit determination processing are executed at different timings, the time saving winning determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the confirmation display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time saving hit determination process may be "time saving hit". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit".

In addition, the sub CPU can visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or an easy effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern or a character). It is preferable to execute control to display the display effect (such as display effect by) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time saving winning determination processing is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination processing, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is possible to visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or instead of displaying an easy effect image on the display device, the time saving winning judgment is made. A display device for displaying an effect image (for example, a change effect of a decorative pattern, a display effect by a character, etc.) in which it is impossible or difficult to visually grasp whether the processing result is a "time reduction hit" or a "time reduction loss". You may perform the control to display in. In this case, it is possible to maintain the interest until the result of the time saving winning determination process is disclosed.

Further, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image showing, for example, a right-handed instruction as a method of launching a game ball recommended in the big hit gaming state. It is controlled so that it is displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this respect, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU performs the time reduction control. As a recommended method of launching a game ball, for example, an effect image indicating a right-handed instruction is controlled to be displayed on the display device. However, when the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the effect image showing the recommended method of launching the game ball when the time saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "time reduction hit" is more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), it is not displayed. You may do so. The above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the condition of the number of time reductions, and may be an arbitrary condition as appropriate.

Further, if the time reduction winning determination processing is executed before the special symbol hit determination processing is executed, the sub CPU is in a situation where the time reduction hit is set (that is, a situation in which the time reduction flag is set to ON). A control may be executed to display an effect image that can be grasped or easily grasped by the appearance on the display device, whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed.

It should be noted that the type of random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the extraction timing of the random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the condition for determining the time-saving hit in the time-saving win judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving win judgment process, and the time-saving win judgment process. The game state that can be executed, the mode of the time saving game state, the time saving number set at the time saving hit, the start timing of the time saving game state, the end timing of the time saving game state, the time saving number rewriting timing, the time saving hit probability, and the time saving winning judgment. The following is a summary of the processes related to time saving, such as displaying the results of the processes.

(Type of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The random number values used in the time saving winning judgment processing are, for example, a random value for determining a special symbol hit, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a normal hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, a random value for determining a special symbol fall, and a random value for determining a fall. It may be any one of a plurality of types of random values such as a dedicated time-saving winning determination random value. Further, if it is a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time saving winning determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

Further, the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving winning judgment random value), and a plurality of types of random values (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value and a symbol determination random value). ) May be used to determine.

(Extraction timing of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is such that when the game ball wins the starting port that triggers the special symbol hit judgment processing, the game ball passes through the passing gate that triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit judgment processing. The time may be any timing, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning opening or the like in which the prize ball is paid out, or a specific gate or a specific out where the prize ball is not paid out. It may be done based on the passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, when the random value for the time saving winning judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting opening, when the game ball wins in either the first starting opening or the second starting opening. Even if there is, the random value for determining the time saving win may be extracted, or the random value for determining the time saving winning may be extracted only when the game ball wins at one of the specific starting openings.

(Conditions for determining time reduction hit in the time reduction hit determination process)
When the time-saving winning judgment processing is performed using the extracted time-saving winning judgment processing random value, the extracted time-saving winning judgment random value is a specific time-saving winning judgment random value (for example, specific time-saving winning judgment value data). It is advisable to make it judged as a time saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving winning judgment processing using the special symbol hit judgment random value, the time saving is shortened when it is a specific loss judgment value data, a specific small hit judgment value data and / or a specific big hit judgment value data. It is good to judge it as a hit. In addition, when executing the time saving hit determination process using the symbol random value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that it is a time saving hit when it is a specific lost symbol, a specific small hit symbol, or a specific big hit symbol. .. Further, when the time saving hit determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the specific special symbol fall determination random value value data is used. Further, when the time saving winning determination process is executed using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the normal hit determination random value or the normal symbol determination random value. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time reduction hit in the time reduction winning determination process are not limited to the above conditions, and can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the hit of opening the accessory. When the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 2152 is opened, whether or not to execute the time saving control and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of the accessory opening. It is good to do so. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not the time reduction control is executed and the number of time reductions based on the "time reduction hit" if the result of the time reduction winning determination process is "time reduction hit". However, the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving loss", the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened. If does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time saving winning judgment processing)
When the time saving winning judgment process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for the time saving winning judgment acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting port, the main CPU performs the start information of the special symbol. Similarly, it is advisable to reserve the acquired random number value for determining the time reduction.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time saving winning determination process immediately (for example, before it is held) when the random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted, or the extracted random number value is reserved. The time saving winning determination processing may be executed until the variable display of the special symbol is started, or the time saving winning determination processing may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Game state in which the time saving winning judgment process can be executed)
The time reduction winning determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the high accuracy non-time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state, and the time reduction control may not be executed in the game state (for example, normal). It may be executed only in the gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). Further, for example, conditions for executing the time-saving winning determination process, such as executing the time-saving winning determination process in any game state or executing the time-saving winning determination process only in a specific gaming state, are set in advance. When the specified conditions are satisfied, the time saving winning determination process may be executed.

(Mode of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning determination process may be the same mode or different modes. For example, a first time saving flag and a second time saving flag are prepared, and when the time saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time saving flag is set to on and based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing. When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to on. In this case, it is preferable to execute the time saving control having different functions depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on and the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set to on, both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the special figure shortening control and the electric support are performed. Only one of the controls can be performed. When the first time saving flag is set to on, the control is performed in the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to, it may be controlled to the second time-shortening gaming state in which only the electric support control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags is set to be turned on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on, for example, the result of the time saving winning determination processing, or the time saving winning determination processing is executed. It may be decided according to the game state at the time of being played.

(Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction hit)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a plurality of time saving winning judgment random numbers are specified as time saving hit judgment value data, the set time saving number of times is set to the gaming state when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed. Alternatively or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random value for determining the time saving. For example, if the random number value for determining the time reduction hit, which is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, is the first time reduction hit determination value data, the number of time reductions is determined to be "100", and the second time reduction is performed. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time reductions to "50".

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may newly set (that is, reset the time saving remaining number) the time saving number determined based on the" time saving hit "instead of the time saving remaining number. In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the number of times of time reduction newly set is larger or less than the number of times of time reduction remaining, and the range of gameplay is widened. It is possible to have a hobby and enhance the interest.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the" time reduction hit "to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the number of remaining time reductions is not less than the current number of remaining time reductions, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU newly sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "instead of the time reduction remaining number, and the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "is the time reduction remaining number. Of the processes to be added to the number of times, one of them may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in an embodiment satisfying the predetermined conditions.

In the pachinko gaming machine in which the time saving control having different functions is executed when the first time saving flag is set to on and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the time saving winning determination process is performed. When the result of is "time saving hit", the main CPU has a time saving of a function different from the case where the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving control of the same function. The process of setting the number of time reductions may be changed depending on the case of control. For example, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving controls having the same function, the time saving number determined based on the "time saving hit" is used as the remaining time saving number. If the time saving control that is added and executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions, the time saving control is based on the "time saving hit" instead of the remaining number of times that the time saving is being executed. The number of time reductions determined in the above process may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on "time saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time saving times during execution are exhausted, the time saving based on "time saving hit" is performed. Control may be performed.

When the number of time reductions is set based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be "0", the time reduction flag is set to on even though the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". Further, when the result of the time reduction winning determination process performed during the execution of the time reduction control is "time reduction hit" and the number of time reductions is set to "0", the execution time reduction control is terminated.

(Start timing of time reduction control)
The start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit" can be the end time of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time reduction control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing is the end time of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning determination processing becomes the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time saving hit judgment process is "time saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a big hit, "time saving hit" is invalidated (based on "time saving hit"). It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on) and the time saving flag is set on based on the hit time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of big hit).

Further, the start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction hit determination process is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame, even if the time reduction control is started immediately (before the special symbol hit determination processing is performed) based on the result of the time reduction winning determination processing. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing and the time of executing the time saving winning judgment processing, which can enhance the interest. Will be.

Further, the start timing of the time saving control to be executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination process being "time saving hit" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been executed. In this case, after the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU executes a fanning effect of whether or not the time reduction control is started until the time reduction control is started. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends. Based on the above, it is advisable to start the time saving control based on the jackpot. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which the time reduction control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155. Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the end of the jackpot game control. Further, the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time reduction hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the accessory opening hit. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control is not executed, the main CPU will reduce the time based on the "time saving hit" based on the closing of the opening / closing winning opening 2151. It is good to start the control.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time reduction game state ends is, for example, "when the variable display of the special symbol is executed over the set number of time reductions in the game state where the time reduction control is executed" and "in the game state where the time reduction control is executed". , When the game is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or" When the number of time reductions is set to 0 even though the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a time reduction hit ", etc. Is.

If the small hit game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the time reduction control is continuously executed even after the small hit game control process is completed. Will be done.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened due to the derivation of the stop symbol mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory during the execution of the time reduction control. However, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 will be used even after the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to execute time reduction control.

(Rewriting the number of time reductions)
When the time saving winning determination process is executed in the gaming state (for example, high accuracy time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state, etc.) in which the time saving control is executed, and the result of this time saving winning determination processing is "time saving hit", the main CPU , The time reduction number may be rewritten, or the time reduction number may not be rewritten (that is, the time reduction control may be executed until the time reduction number in the running time reduction control is exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" when the number of time reductions in the running time reduction control is exhausted. It may be set at the time of executing the special symbol hit determination process, at the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol, at the time reduction winning determination process, or at various timings. can do. In addition, when it is set at the time of the time reduction winning determination processing, the time reduction number determined based on the "time reduction hit" is overwritten with the time reduction number in the execution time reduction control. Further, the number of time reductions may be set in any of "rewriting the number of time reductions" and "adding to the previous number of time reductions" in a manner satisfying the predetermined conditions.

(Probability of shortening the time)
When the time saving winning determination process is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening, the time saving winning determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening (hereinafter, "No. 1"). The time saving hit probability is referred to as "1 time saving winning determination process") and the time saving winning determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time saving winning determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening. May be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving winning determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning determination process is performed, or the second time saving winning determination process may be performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving hit determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability in the case of being broken, or the time saving winning determination process when the first time saving winning determination process is performed and the second time saving winning determination process. The probability of hitting the time reduction may be the same or almost the same as that of the case where.

(Display of the result of the time saving winning judgment process)
The number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction winning judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (whether it is a time reduction hit or the time reduction loss) and / and the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (time reduction hit). May be provided with a winning time reduction number display unit to display. The time reduction winning determination result display unit and / and the winning time reduction number display unit may be provided in an LED display group provided with a special symbol display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU may display the result of the time reduction winning determination process and / or the number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction hit on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. good.

(interval)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game. The interval time may be longer than the above interval time when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a “time reduction loss”. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the bonus opening hit and the big hit game control process is not executed based on this bonus opening hit, the main CPU 2201 loses the time saving. The interval time after the end of the operation for opening the accessory when the result of the judgment process is "time saving hit" is made longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Extended example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described in the present specification play a game using a gaming medium, and a privilege (for example, a prize) is obtained based on the result of the gaming. It can be applied to all gaming machines to which a ball, prize data, etc.) is given. That is, if the game is played by launching or throwing a game medium (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. Instead, the main control circuit itself may be capable of electromagnetically managing the game medium owned by the player and performing a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In the case of a gaming machine that circulates the enclosed gaming balls to play a game, the gaming balls as a gaming medium are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that the prize balls will be paid out when a prize is won. Instead, prize ball data as a game medium is given. In this specification, the "game value to be paid out" includes the meaning of both the prize ball and the prize ball data. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls is given to the enclosed gaming machine. Further, the game value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball and the prize ball data, and may be any one corresponding to the prize ball and the prize ball data.

Further, when the gaming medium management device connected to the main control circuit manages the gaming medium management device, the gaming medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the gaming machine, and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to the two-way communication function via a game medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). When the winning combination related to the payout of the gaming medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout operation of the gaming medium (that is, the payout of the gaming medium to the player is performed, and the necessary gaming medium is provided. It may be possible to perform an operation of acquiring the game) or electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game. Further, the gaming medium management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of gaming media possessed on the front of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, the recording medium is not limited to being discharged, and cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko gaming machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachi-slot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball is configured to be launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the enclosed gaming machine can avoid a so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine. Further, without providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game ball polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game machine are provided. May be good. In this case, the capture mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to capture, or may be configured to capture from a winning opening provided in the game area.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed gaming machine, the gaming ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the gaming ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. Further, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. Further, for example, at the end of the game, the entire game value (that is, the ball held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be settled, or a part of the ball held may be transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls held is integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held is reduced. .. Furthermore, there is no concept of a foul ball in a type of gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from above the gaming area, but a foul ball is generated when a gaming ball is launched from below as in a conventional gaming machine. sell. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine of a type in which a gaming ball is launched from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball is generated. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases depending on consumption, lending, and payout. Further, the "data on the increase / decrease in the game medium due to the consumption, lending and payout of the game medium" is the data on the decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of the game ball and the increase in the number of balls held due to the lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the gaming medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by a game media management device. In the second embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange or the like in a game field or the like where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening may be continuously detected by the door opening sensor. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The enclosed gaming machine may be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming ball. For example, the enclosed gaming machine is of a type in which the gaming ball is circulated only by the gaming machine without being circulated by the island equipment. , And the type in which the gaming ball circulates in the island equipment but the player cannot touch the gaming ball, etc. are also included in the enclosed gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received are the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with either one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set aside from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is not only confirmed that the regular signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the regular signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities. Further, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game medium management device by communication, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game medium management device, and the main control circuit is connected to the main control circuit via the frame control circuit. A communication connection with the game medium management device may be made. Further, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the launch control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at the symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate the jackpot symbol. Process so that there is nothing to do.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the other Control is performed to forcibly stop the special symbol of the above with a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state as described above. In this jackpot gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the start of the second special symbol are started. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general game is performed. The timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted based on the transition from the state to the small hit gaming state (stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol), and the transition from the small hit gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the end of the small hit game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the small hit gaming state as described above, but in this small hit gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed and one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU is in the variable display. Regarding the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the LED group is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted as described above.

[5. 4th pachinko game machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The differences between the fourth pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine will be mainly described.

The appearance configuration and mechanical configuration of the fourth pachinko gaming machine are the same as the mechanical configuration and electrical configuration of the third pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to the mechanical and electrical configuration requirements of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although the third pachinko gaming machine has been described as a sequentially variable machine, the fourth pachinko gaming machine has a priority variation in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a machine.

The first special symbol display unit 2163 and the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko gaming machine constitute a variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information. The main RAM 2203 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a hold information that can store hold information for holding the display result derived by the first special symbol display unit 2163 and the second special symbol display unit 2164. Consists of storage means.

[5-1. Game flow]
With reference to FIG. 81, the flow of the game of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" is derived, the gaming state shifts to the big hit gaming state. ..

It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine does not have a stop display mode indicating that the first special symbol hit determination process is a “small hit”. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine, there is no "small hit" due to the first special symbol.

In this pachinko gaming machine, the V attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit" (hereinafter, also referred to as a "feature opening hit"). Then, when the gaming ball that has entered the opened V attacker wins a prize in the V winning opening in the V attacker, the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

Further, in this pachinko gaming machine, when the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving gaming state of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal gaming state as compared with the normal gaming state (see FIG. 65), and the shutter for general electric power of the ordinary electric accessory is used. By making the opening time of (see FIG. 61) relatively long, it becomes easier for the gaming ball to win (pass) the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 61).

In this pachinko gaming machine, there are a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode as a stop display mode of the first special symbol that shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state. When it is decided to shift from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the probability that the first stop display mode is selected as the stop display mode of the first special symbol is higher than the probability that the second stop display mode is selected. Is also expensive.

For example, when it is determined to shift from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the probability that the first stop display mode is selected as the stop display mode of the first special symbol is 99%, and the second stop display mode is The probability that is selected is 1%.

After the jackpot gaming state (“Special Figure 1 jackpot (99%)” in FIG. 81) that has shifted due to the derivation of the first stop display mode to the first special symbol is completed, 9 fluctuations (time reduction 5 fluctuations +) It shifts to a time-saving game state (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "normal time-saving game state") over the remaining hold 4 fluctuations). When the normal time saving game state is entered, the effect state (effect mode) shifts to the art run mode.

After the transition to the jackpot gaming state (“Special Figure 1 jackpot (1%)” in FIG. 81) due to the derivation of the second stop display mode to the first special symbol is completed, or the ceiling condition described later is satisfied. If this is the case (“reaching the ceiling” in FIG. 81), the system shifts to a time-saving game state (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special time-saving game state”) over 23 fluctuations.

When the game shifts to the special time saving game state, the effect state shifts to the immediate continuous mode over 8 fluctuations, and then shifts to the charge mode over 15 fluctuations (time saving 11 fluctuations + remaining hold 4 fluctuations). In the special time-saving game state, the effect state (effect mode) may be changed to the charge mode and then to the immediate continuous mode.

In the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state, the big hit game state (in FIG. 81, "special figure") shifted by deriving the stop display mode indicating that the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "big hit". After the big hit game state (“V prize big hit” in FIG. 81) that has been transferred due to the game ball winning the V prize opening in the V attacker is completed, the game state is again shortened to a special time. It shifts to the game state. Therefore, the effect state shifts to the immediate mode.

As described above, the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko gaming machine has a plurality of games including a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state (specific gaming state), and a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state). A gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state between states is configured.

[5-1-1. Ceiling conditions]
The time-saving gaming state in this pachinko gaming machine is a general time-saving gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as “A time saving”) that shifts after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the number of fluctuations at low probability is n. It also serves as a time-saving game state (hereinafter, also referred to as "B time-saving") that is activated based on this.

In this pachinko gaming machine, when the number of operations n is reached in the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the special time-saving gaming state as the B time saving, and the effect state shifts to the immediate continuous mode.

The number of fluctuations related to the number of operations n is always counted as long as the probability is low, regardless of whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, the number of operations n is set to 959.

The number of operations n is not limited to this, and if the jackpot probability (ML) in the setting with the lowest jackpot probability is set within the range of "2.5 / ML ≦ n ≦ 3.0 / ML". Therefore, the number of operations n may be set to 750 or the like. Also, ML corresponds to the reciprocal of the probability of winning a "big hit".

The number of fluctuations related to the number of operations n is reset when the RAM is cleared, when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting, or when the condition device is operated or terminated. In this pachinko gaming machine, the number of fluctuations related to the number of operations n is reset at the time of executing the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 17) and at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The number of fluctuations related to the number of operations n is counted by adding up the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In this pachinko gaming machine, the time reduction number N of B time reduction is set to 23. Not limited to this, since the time reduction number N may be set so as to be within the range of "N ≦ 3.8 / ML", the number of times such as 150 times may be set. Further, this pachinko gaming machine is equipped with only one time saving number N. The other end conditions for the B time reduction are the same as the A time reduction.

In this pachinko gaming machine, in the time-saving game, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the same as that in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened as compared with the normal game state (see FIG. 85), and the normal electric accessory. By making the opening time of the shutter for general electric power (see FIG. 61) longer than that in the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is substantially realized.

That is, in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long and the opening time of the normal electric accessory is set to be extremely short, so that the game ball to the ordinary electric accessory can be played without making a difference in the hit probability of the normal symbol. It is configured to be able to be suppressed. On the other hand, in the time-saving game, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and setting the opening time of the normal electric accessory to be long, the game ball wins the ordinary electric accessory without making a difference in the hit probability of the ordinary symbol. Is configured to facilitate.

It should be noted that the probability of the normal map may be set to be high only in the normal time-saving game state, and the probability of the normal map in the special time-saving game state may be the same as that of the normal game state. Further, the probability of the normal map may be set to be the same as that of the normal gaming state only in the time-saving state shifted via the B time reduction, and the probability of the normal map in the time-reduced state transferred via the jackpot may be set to a high probability.

When the number of operations n is reached, it is not necessary to display the dedicated symbol as a special symbol, and when the number of operations n is reached, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "missing", the symbol corresponding to "missing" is displayed. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the symbol corresponding to the "small hit" may be displayed.

For example, in FIG. 5, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the three LEDs of the first special symbol display LED group 163a are turned on, the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol is turned off. When the result of the hit determination process is "small hit", the two LEDs of the first special symbol display LED group 163a are turned on, the other LEDs are turned off, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "missing". One LED of the first special symbol display LED group 163a is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off.

In this case, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "missing" when the number of operations n is reached, one LED of the first special symbol display LED group 163a is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. Further, when the number of operations n is reached, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the two LEDs of the first special symbol display LED group 163a are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

That is, the first special symbol display LED group 163a does not light in the lighting mode indicating that the number of operations n is reached when the number of operations n is reached.

As the fluctuation pattern when the number of operations n is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern is selected only for the fluctuation pattern table selected after hitting. If a small hit is won when the number of operations n is reached, both the time-saving gaming state and the small hit gaming state are activated.

That is, when the number of operations n is reached, a predetermined gaming value can be provided based on the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, and it is more advantageous than the normal gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state. Since it is possible to shift to a time-saving gaming state, it is possible to provide a new game-like gaming machine that has never existed before.

[5-2. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 87. The fourth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

[5-2-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 82 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120, the lottery result is ". It is decided as "big hit" or "missing".

When a game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the lottery result is "big hit" and "opening of the accessory" in the hit judgment process of the second special symbol using the random value for big hit judgment of the second special symbol. It is decided as "hit" or "missing".

It is not essential that the "feature opening hit" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "feature opening hit". It is preferable that the determination is made only with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. Further, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, it may not be determined as "missing".

In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, "big hit" or "loss" is used as the data used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first start port 2120. The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for jackpot determination determined in 1 and the corresponding determination value data (“big hit determination value data”, “loss determination value data”) is defined.

Further, as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140, the jackpot determination determined as "big hit", "feature opening hit" or "missing". The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for use and the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data”, “feature opening hit judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) is defined.

The fourth pachinko machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined as "big hit", but this is not essential, and the probability change flag is turned on according to the type of jackpot, for example. It may be set so that the jackpot probability can be increased.

Further, in this fourth pachinko gaming machine, the total random value of the jackpot determination random value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned jackpot determination random value is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability or / and the accessory opening hit probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting.

In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus opening hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus opening hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. May be.

Further, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and the accessory opening hit probability according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of shortening of time may be changed for each set value.

That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the winning probability of opening the accessory, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening the time reduction. By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[5-2-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 83 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a "hit time selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the start ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is the table that is referred to when selecting "Design" and "Design specification command".

The "hit time selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, and the "symbol specification command" is a command. This command is used to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 83, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. Be selected.

That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 1 to 99, "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA2" is selected as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 39, "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 40 to 99, "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 29, "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 30 to 49, "z5" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 50 to 99, "z6" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA7" is selected as the symbol specification command.

[5-2-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 84 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table is a time-saving flag indicating the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state and whether or not it is in the time-saving state according to the hit-time selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. It is referred to when determining the type of jackpot, such as the value and the number of time reductions. The remarks column in FIG. 84 is described for convenience so that it can be easily understood.

As shown in FIG. 84, for example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state is "6", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the big hit. The number of time reductions after the game state is determined to be "9".

In the case of the hit selection symbol commands "z4", "z5", and "z6", when the judgment value data is "the winning judgment value data for opening the accessory" (that is, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the accessory. It is a hit selection symbol command (in the case of an open hit), and the V attacker 2152 is opened by the opening hit of the accessory, and the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is detected, so that the game is controlled to the big hit game state. The number of rounds and the number of time reductions are specified. Therefore, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the game is not controlled to the big hit game state, it is described in the remarks column. As described above, the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, and the number of time reductions specified in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 84 is not set.

If the reserved information of the second special symbol remains in the reserved information storage means before the "opening of the accessory", only the remaining reserved information corresponds to the immediate continuous mode or the charge mode described later. Perform the production to be done.

[5-2-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 85 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 85 is shown for convenience for easy understanding.

The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. do. In this way, the main CPU 2201 constitutes the variation pattern selection means.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the main CPU 2201 wins the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2120 ( It is determined based on the effect selection random value acquired at the time of passing).

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "missing", the main CPU 2201 sets the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol to the value of the time saving flag, the time saving table number, and the game ball to the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value acquired when the player wins (passes).

The time saving table number is referred to when the value of the time saving flag is "1". That is, the time saving table number is not referred to when the value of the time saving flag is "0". Since right-handed hitting is recommended in the short-time game state, it is considered that the game ball rarely wins in the first starting port 2120.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 obtains the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 has the time saving table number, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2140. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value acquired at the time of winning.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time. Is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation effect, for example, 600,000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", the game ball basically does not win (pass) the second starting port 2140, but an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 should be used. Even if the game ball wins a prize, it is done in this way in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the player, but it is not always necessary to do so.

In addition, as a method of minimizing the profit that can be given to the player due to the change of the second special symbol during the normal gaming state, the change time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time, but the method is Not limited to this.

For example, by setting the opening time of the V-attacker 2152, which is released when the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is "the opening of the accessory", to an extremely short time, the V-attacker 2152 can be substantially reached. It may be set so as to make it difficult to win a game ball. Further, both the method of lengthening the fluctuation time and the method of shortening the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be used.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "missing" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the time saving table number and the second. 2 Determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value acquired when the game ball wins (passes) in the starting port 2140.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "missing" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a character open hit". As in the case where the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol to be an extremely long variation effect having an extremely long variation time of, for example, 600,000 msec.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls a display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007, a sound effect output from the speaker 2032, and a light emission effect by the LED group 2046 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201. ..

In the variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 85, the time saving table number 0 is selected in the normal time saving game state, and any one of the time saving table numbers 1 to 5 is selected in the special time saving game state.

The table of fluctuation patterns in which the value of the time saving flag corresponds to "0" corresponds to the normal fluctuation pattern table in the present invention. The table of variation patterns corresponding to the time saving table numbers 1 to 5 corresponds to the specific variation pattern table in the present invention.

The table of variation patterns corresponding to the time saving table numbers 1 and 2 corresponds to the first specific variation pattern table in the present invention. The table of variation patterns corresponding to the time saving table numbers 3 to 5 corresponds to the second specific variation pattern table in the present invention. The fluctuation patterns of the time saving table numbers 1 to 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87.

In the time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number according to the game state. For example, the main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number 0 if the gaming state is the normal time saving gaming state.

Further, if the gaming state is the special time saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 selects any of the time saving table numbers 1 to 5 according to the number of games in the special time saving gaming state.

As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the variation pattern corresponding to the time saving table numbers 1 and 2 is selected when the effect state is the immediate mode (see FIG. 81), and the time saving table number 3 is selected. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to ~ 5 is selected when the effect state is the charge mode (see FIG. 81).

As shown in FIG. 86, in the special time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number according to the variation pattern table selection table.

In FIG. 86, the main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number 1 from the first variation to the seventh variation of the special symbol. From the 1st variation to the 7th variation, the effect state is the immediate continuous mode (see FIG. 81).

The main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number 2 in the eighth variation of the special symbol. The eighth variation is the final variation in the immediate mode (see FIG. 81). Here, the sub CPU 2301 executes an effect state transition effect, which will be described later, indicating that the immediate connection mode is changed to the charge mode when the eighth variation in the immediate connection mode is “missing”.

It should be noted that the time saving table number 1 is more likely to select a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time relatively shorter than that of the time saving table number 2. However, when the hit result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory" when the time saving table number 1 is set, a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the time saving table number 2 may be selected.

The main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number 3 in the 9th variation of the special symbol, and selects the time saving table number 4 from the 10th variation to the 13th variation of the special symbol.

The main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number so as to repeat the same pattern from the 9th variation to the 13th variation of the special symbol from the 14th variation to the 18th variation of the special symbol. From the 9th variation to the 18th variation of the special symbol, the effect state corresponds to the first set and the second set in the charge mode (see FIG. 81).

The main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number 5 at the 19th variation of the special symbol, and selects the time saving table number 4 from the 20th variation to the 23rd variation of the special symbol.

Here, the sub CPU 2301 displays a result screen indicating that the charge mode shifts to the normal gaming state when all of the 19th to 23rd fluctuations in the charge mode are “missing”. From the 19th variation to the 23rd variation of the special symbol, the effect state corresponds to the third set in the charge mode (see FIG. 81).

As for the time saving table number 4, it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time relatively shorter than that of the time saving table number 5. However, when the hit result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory" when the time saving table number 4 is set, a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the time saving table number 5 may be selected.

FIG. 87 shows an example of the fluctuation time when the time saving table number is selected according to the fluctuation pattern table selection table shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 87, the fluctuation time in each variation from the first variation to the 23rd variation of the special symbol is represented by the width of each rectangle.

[Variation time variation example in special time saving game state]
As an example of the variation time of the special time reduction game state in FIG. 87, it is shown that the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the time reduction table number shown in FIG. 86 is 4 is configured to be substantially the same. , The selection of variation patterns is not limited to this (see FIG. 85).

As shown in FIG. 85, as the fluctuation time when the time reduction table number is 4, when the hit result of the special symbol shows "missing", the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time of 100 ms or 200 ms is selected as the fluctuation time. Will be done.

Further, as the fluctuation time when the time saving table number is 4, when the hit result of the special symbol indicates "big hit" or "opening of the accessory", the medium fluctuation time of 1000 ms or 3000 ms is selected as the fluctuation time. ..

As for the fluctuation time when the time saving table number is 3 or 5, a fluctuation pattern of at least 50,000 ms or more is selected regardless of the hit result of the special symbol.

That is, as the fluctuation time when the time reduction table number is 4, the fluctuation time when the hit result of the special symbol indicates "big hit" or "feature opening hit" is the "loss" when the time reduction table number is 4. A variation pattern with a longer variation time than the case is selected, and is set to be always shorter than the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected when the time saving table number is 3 or 5.

In this way, the number of fluctuations in the special time-saving gaming state can be diversified from 10 to 13, 15 to 18, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuations performed at the 20th to 23rd times. Since it becomes possible to reduce the feeling of boredom caused by repeating monotonous fluctuations with time, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[5-3. Main control process]
The various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are partially different between the fourth pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, but the other processes are the same.

Therefore, in the following, various processes different from those of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described, and the description of other processes will be omitted. The various processes in the fourth pachinko gaming machine include the same processes as those performed in the third pachinko gaming machine, but in the following, the same processes as those performed in the third pachinko gaming machine are included. , I will explain again by changing the step number.

[5-3-1. Special symbol variable display start processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variable display start process in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. When the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 (see FIG. 67) during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing called in S2013 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

First, in S3001, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The control state number of the special symbol is set to "0" when the special symbol game of 1 is completed and the next special symbol game can be executed (see FIG. 71). ..

When it is determined in S3001 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S3001 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3001 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S3001 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3002.

In S3002, the main CPU 2201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S3002, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 82) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a bonus opening hit, or a loss.

In the hit determination process of the first special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit, it is determined to be a loss. Similarly, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not there is a bonus opening hit is performed. If it is determined in this process that it is not a hit for opening the accessory, it is determined to be a loss. After executing the process of S3003, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S3003) of the special symbol (for example, a big hit, an opening hit of an accessory, or a loss).

In this process, the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 83) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S3004, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3005.

In S3005, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of jackpot when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a jackpot or an accessory open hit.

In this process, the jackpot type is determined according to the "hit time selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S3004) with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 84). The type of big hit determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, the opening of the accessory is that the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the opening of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and bonus opening hits, but there may be only one type of jackpot or bonus opening hits. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of big hits and / and hits for opening the accessory, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. After executing the process of S3005, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the main CPU 2201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. The details of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 89. After executing the process of S3006, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the main CPU 2201 performs the variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, when the variation time is added by the variation pattern determination process (S3006) of the special symbol, the variation time added by the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol, and is special. When the fluctuation time is not added by the fluctuation pattern determination processing of the symbol, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination processing (S3006) of the special symbol is referred to with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85). The time is determined as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. After executing the process of S3007, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3008.

In S3008, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 67) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. It will be. After executing the process of S3008, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3009, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 are updated. After executing the process of S3009, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3010.

In S3010, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the time saving flag and the like) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S3010, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3011.

In S3011, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S3010), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S3011)) within the interrupt disabled section. It is preferable to do it in.

[5-3-2. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, in S3021, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the gaming state has become the B time reduction. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is at the time of entering the B time reduction.

Here, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations related to the number of operations n has reached the specified number. Specifically, if the value of the above-mentioned symbol fixed number counter (see FIG. 69) is a predetermined number (960), the main CPU 2201 determines that the game state is at the time of entering the B time reduction, and determines that the symbol fixed number counter is in the game state. If the value is not a predetermined number (960), it is determined that the gaming state is not at the time of entering the B time reduction.

In this pachinko gaming machine, the symbol fixed number counter continues to count after the next fluctuation without being reset regardless of whether the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number or the number of fluctuations does not reach the specified number. do. The symbol fixed number counter is configured to be reset at the timing of the start or end of the big hit or the timing of clearing the RAM.

The value of the symbol fixed number counter is always counted at the end of the fluctuation if it is in the low probability state. The count of the symbol fixed number counter value is not limited to the end of the fluctuation, and may be counted at the start of the fluctuation.

If it is determined in S3021 that the time is shortened to B (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3022. If it is determined in S3021 that it is not the time when the B time is shortened (NO), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3023.

In S3022, the main CPU 2201 sets the special flag indicating whether or not the B time reduction has entered to 1. The special flag is reset to 0 when the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 17) is executed (for example, after S53, S55, or S56). As described above, the special flag is a flag that can be established when the normal game state is changed to the B time reduction, but is not established when the B time reduction is changed to the normal game state. After executing the process of S3022, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3023.

In S3023, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 2201 refers to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85), and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the time saving flag value, the time saving table number, and the reach determination. The fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time of the special symbol are determined according to the random value or / and the random value for effect selection. After executing the process of S3023, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the special flag is 1. If it is determined in S3024 that the special flag is 1 (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3025. If it is determined in S3024 that the special flag is not 1, the main CPU 2201 ends the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol.

In S3025, the main CPU 2201 adds the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in S3023. For example, the main CPU 2201 adds so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in S3023 becomes a constant time.

The main CPU 2201 may add a fixed time to the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in S3023. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3026.

In S3026, the main CPU 2201 resets the special flag to 0. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 2201 ends the change pattern determination process of the special symbol.

In this way, the main CPU 2201 sets the special flag to 1 in the game in which the game state is shortened to B, and adds the fluctuation time of the special symbol on condition that the special flag is set to 1. , The execution time of the notification effect (ceiling time reduction rush effect to be described later) for notifying that the game state has shifted to the B time reduction is secured.

The first fluctuation pattern that is transferred after the B time reduction occurrence condition is satisfied is the fluctuation time of the second special symbol added according to the establishment of the special flag, while the first fluctuation pattern that is transferred after the "big hit" is the special flag. Is not established, so the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not added.

That is, the first fluctuation pattern that is transferred after the condition for generating the B time reduction is satisfied is configured so that the second special symbol fluctuation with a relatively longer fluctuation time is more likely to be executed than the first fluctuation pattern that is transferred after the "big hit". Has been done.

If the first fluctuation pattern that is transferred after the "big hit" is "big hit" or "feature opening hit", the fluctuation time is longer than the first fluctuation pattern that is transferred after the condition for generating the B time reduction is satisfied. The second special symbol change may be executed.

The time added based on the setting of the special flag is the execution time of the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to secure the effect time of the notification effect based on whether or not the special flag is established without changing the variation pattern table. Therefore, the variation pattern table is changed according to whether or not the B time reduction is established. Since there is no need to execute it, the burden of control processing can be reduced.

The time added based on the special flag is not limited to the time required to execute only the notification effect. For example, at the time added based on the special flag, a different effect (for example, a game effect related to the change result of the special symbol) may be executed in addition to the notification effect, or an effect different from the notification effect (for example). , A game effect related to the change result of a special symbol) may be executed.

In this case, since the determination of the fluctuation time can be diversified, the effectable amount can be determined regardless of the determination of the variation pattern by the main CPU 2201, and therefore the effect time can be determined during the variation display. The amount of effect that can be performed can also be increased.

In addition, since the special flag is a flag that is established only when the condition for generating the B time reduction is satisfied, it is normal when the normal time reduction game state and / or when the special time reduction game state is changed to the normal game state or after the "big hit" is completed. It is a flag that is not established when shifting to the time-saving game state and / or the special time-saving game state.

[5-3-3. Special symbol variation pattern determination process (first modification)]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a first modification of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol shown in FIG. 89.

First, in S3031, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the gaming state has become the B time reduction. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is at the time of entering the B time reduction.

If it is determined in S3031 that the time is shortened to B (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3032. If it is determined in S3031 that it is not the time when the B time is shortened (NO), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3035.

In S3032, the main CPU 2201 sets the special flag indicating whether or not the B time reduction has entered to 1. The special flag is reset to 0 when the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 17) is executed. After executing the process of S3032, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3033.

In S3033, the main CPU 2201 executes a special variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol at the time of entering the B time reduction. In this modification, in the main ROM 2202, in addition to the variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 85, a special variation pattern table in which the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to at least the time saving table number 1 is added in advance is stored. ing. The special variation pattern table is a variation pattern table of a special symbol that is referred to only when the special flag is set to 1.

For example, the fluctuation time corresponding to the time saving table number 1 in the special variation pattern table may be a constant time longer than the fluctuation time corresponding to the time saving table number 1 in the variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. , The time may be a time obtained by adding a certain period to the fluctuation time corresponding to the time saving table number 1 in the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG.

In the special variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 2201 refers to the special variation pattern table, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the time reduction flag value, the time reduction table number, and the reach determination. The fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time of the special symbol are determined according to the random value and / and the random value for effect selection. After executing the process of S3033, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3034.

It should be noted that different fluctuation time fluctuation patterns may be selected according to the hit determination result of the special symbol, or a fixed fluctuation time fluctuation pattern may be selected regardless of the hit determination result. good.

In S3034, the main CPU 2201 resets the special flag to 0. After executing the process of S3034, the main CPU 2201 ends the process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In S3035, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal fluctuation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol other than the time-shortening rush. In the normal variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 2201 refers to the variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 85, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol, and the value of the time saving flag. The variation pattern and variation time of the special symbol are determined according to the time saving table number, the reach determination random value and / and the effect selection random value, and the like. After executing the process of S3035, the main CPU 2201 ends the variable display time setting process of the special symbol.

When the main CPU 2201 executes the first modification of the special symbol variation pattern determination process, in the special symbol variable display time setting process (S3007) of the special symbol variable display start process shown in FIG. 88, Of the special variation pattern table and the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85), the variation pattern table referred to in the first modification of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is referred to, and the first modification of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is referred to. The fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the example is determined as the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

[5-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern determination process (second modification)]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a second modification of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol shown in FIG. 88.

First, in S3041, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 2201 refers to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85), and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the time saving flag value, the time saving table number, and the reach determination. The fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time of the special symbol are determined according to the random value or / and the random value for effect selection. After executing the process of S3041, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3042.

In S3042, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the special flag is 1. If it is determined in S3042 that the special flag is 1 (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3043. If it is determined in S3042 that the special flag is not 1, (NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol. The timing at which the special flag is set to 1 in the second modification will be described later with reference to FIG. 92.

In S3043, the main CPU 2201 adds the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in S3041. For example, the main CPU 2201 adds so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in S3041 becomes a constant time. The main CPU 2201 may add a fixed time to the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in S3041. After executing the process of S3043, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3044.

In S3044, the main CPU 2201 resets the special flag to 0. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 2201 ends the change pattern determination process of the special symbol.

[5-3-5. Special symbol variable display end processing (transformation example)]
When the main CPU 2201 is to execute the second modification of the special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG. 91, the special symbol variable display end process shown in FIG. 69 is changed as follows. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a modification of the special symbol variable display end process shown in FIG. 69.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, in S3051, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process. If it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3052.

In S3052, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 67) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. Will be. After executing the process of S3052, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3053.

In S3053, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3053, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3054.

In S3054, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games. After executing the process of S3054, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3055.

In S3055, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations is the specified number of times. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations related to the number of operations n has reached 959, and determines whether or not the game state will be shortened to B time in the next game.

If it is determined in S3055 that the number of fluctuations is the specified number (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3056. If it is determined in S3055 that the number of fluctuations is not the specified number (NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process.

In S3056, the main CPU 2201 sets the special flag to 1. After executing the process of S3056, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process.

[5-3-6. Modification example of main control processing]
In the special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 and the special symbol variable display end process shown in FIG. 92, the game state is shortened to B time (that is, the next game having the number of operations n) or the game. By setting the special flag to 1 in the game in which the state is B time reduction (that is, the game in which the number of operations is n) and adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol on condition that the special flag is set to 1. In the first game in which the game state has changed to the B time reduction, an example of securing the execution time of the notification effect for notifying that the game state has changed to the B time reduction has been described.

On the other hand, the main CPU 2201 is one game before the game in which the game state is shortened to B (that is, the game having the number of operations n) or two games before the game in which the game state is shortened to B (that is, the number of operations n-1). By setting the special flag to 1 and adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol on the condition that the special flag is set to 1, the game state shifts to B time reduction in the next game. It is also possible to secure the execution time of the notification effect for notifying that.

Further, the main CPU 2201 is conditioned on the condition that the special flag is set to 1 from the predetermined number of games before the game state becomes B time reduction (for example, before 10 games) to 1 game before, and the special flag is set to 1. , The execution time of the notification effect for notifying that the gaming state shifts to the B time reduction may be secured by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

In this case, the variable time can be added even in the game before the transition to the B time reduction. Therefore, since it is possible to secure the execution time for executing the ceiling time reduction precursor effect described later, it becomes possible to play with a sense of expectation even if the fluctuation is immediately before the B time reduction rush. Therefore, it will be possible to prevent the decline in interest.

In this way, when the special flag is set to 1 over a plurality of games, the main CPU 2201 adds the variation time of the special symbol so that the variation time of the special symbol changes sequentially for each game. May be good.

In this case, since the fluctuation time can be set regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the range of feasible production can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

For example, when the special flag is set to 1 over a plurality of games, the main CPU 2201 may add the variation time of the special symbol so that the variation time of the special symbol becomes longer for each game.

Further, when the special flag is set to 1 over a plurality of games, the main CPU 2201 may add the fluctuation time of the special symbol so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened for each game.

Further, the main CPU 2201 sets the special flag to 1 from the predetermined number of games before the game state becomes B time reduction (for example, before 10 games) to the game in which the game state becomes B time reduction, and the special flag is set to 1. By adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the execution time of the ceiling time reduction precursor effect and the ceiling time reduction rush effect, which will be described later, may be secured.

[5-4. Various productions]
Hereinafter, the effect executed by the sub control process (see FIG. 40) executed by the sub CPU 2301 will be described. The sub CPU 2301 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko gaming machine constitutes the effect executing means according to the present invention. The display device 2007 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko gaming machine constitutes the display means according to the present invention.

[5-4-1. Ceiling time reduction precursor production]
The sub CPU 2301 has a background image of the effect image displayed on the display device 2007 when the gaming state reaches the B time reduction, that is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the transition to the special time reduction gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). By changing the display mode such as, the ceiling time reduction precursor effect is executed in which the display device 2007 displays the number of changes in the special symbol until the gaming state shifts to the special time saving gaming state.

For example, if the number of changes in the special symbol until the gaming state shifts to the special time saving gaming state is 10, the sub CPU 2301 displays "10" on the display device 2007 until the gaming state shifts to the B time saving. If the number of changes in the special symbol is 9, "9" is displayed on the display device 2007, and similarly, the number of changes in the special symbol until the gaming state shifts to the special time-saving gaming state is displayed on the display device 2007. If the number of changes in the special symbol until the gaming state shifts to the special time-saving gaming state is 1, "LAST" is displayed on the display device 2007. Such a ceiling time reduction precursor effect corresponds to the second suggestive effect in the present invention.

The ceiling time reduction precursor effect is executed after the change of the special symbol starts, and ends before the change of the special symbol stops. That is, it is an effect that is displayed after the decorative symbol starts to change and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by ending the display when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

[5-4-2. Ceiling time saving rush production]
As shown in FIG. 93, in the sub CPU 2301, during the first change of the special symbol in which the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the special time saving gaming state when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the operation number n related to the B time reduction. , The ceiling time reduction rush effect is executed as a notification effect to notify the transition to the special time reduction game state.

The ceiling time reduction effect is an effect executed by the next variation when the number of operations n is reached. That is, it is an effect that is not executed until the change of the second special symbol is started after the number of operations n is reached.

In the ceiling time reduction rush effect, the sub CPU 2301 has a ceiling arrival image showing that the ceiling has been reached, an effect explanation image explaining the effect in the special time reduction game state, and a image related to the shield acquisition effect of acquiring the shield item used in the charge mode. A display device that sequentially or at least partially duplicates a title image showing a special time-saving game state, a time-saving transitioned image showing that the game state has shifted to the special time-saving game state, and a right-handed recommended image that recommends right-handed hitting. Displayed in 2007. While executing the ceiling time saving rush effect, the sub CPU 2301 executes an effect relating to the change of the first special symbol in which the gaming state shifts to the special time saving gaming state (for example, an effect relating to the immediate continuous mode).

The sub CPU 2301 continues to execute the ceiling time saving rush effect on condition that the change of the second special symbol does not start when the first special symbol whose gaming state has changed to the special time saving gaming state is stopped and displayed.

That is, the sub CPU 2301 has the time-reduced video and the time-reduced video, provided that the change of the second special symbol does not start when the first second special symbol whose gaming state has shifted to the special time-saving gaming state is stopped and displayed. , The display of the right-handed recommended image is continued, and the time-saving transitioned image and the right-handed recommended image are displayed on condition that the change of the second special symbol is started.

[5-4-3. Short rush production at the end of the hit]
As shown in FIG. 94, the sub CPU 2301 is in a jackpot gaming state that shifts to a special time-saving gaming state (see “Special Figure 1 jackpot (1%)”, “Special Figure 2 jackpot”, and “V winning jackpot” in FIG. 81). In the end interval of, the hit result image showing the total number of acquired points indicating the total number of payout game media based on the number of acquired points indicating the number of payout game media in the current jackpot game state and the number of continuations of the jackpot game state is displayed on the display device 2007. After displaying, the hit end time reduction rush effect is executed as a notification effect to notify the transition to the special time reduction game state. It is not always necessary to display the hit result image, and instead of displaying the hit result image at the end interval, it may be displayed at the end of the special time-saving game state.

In the hit end time reduction rush effect, the sub CPU 2301 displays a warning image that calls attention to forgetting to take the prepaid medium and getting stuck, a video related to the shield acquisition effect that acquires the shield item used in the charge mode, and a title of the special time saving game state. The title image to be represented and the time-saving transition image indicating that the gaming state shifts to the special time-saving gaming state are sequentially or at least partially overlapped and displayed on the display device 2007.

In the hit end time short rush effect, the sub CPU 2301 displays a warning image on the display device 2007 during the end interval of the big hit game state (including the big hit game state that does not shift to the special time short game state) that has transitioned from the normal gaming state. However, it is not necessary to display the warning image on the display device 2007 during the end interval of the jackpot game state shifted from the time-saving game state excluding the B time reduction. Further, as shown in FIG. 93, the sub CPU 2301 does not display the warning image on the display device 2007 in the ceiling time reduction rush effect.

When the end interval of the big hit gaming state that shifts to the special time saving game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the hit ending time saving rush effect. It should be noted that the sub CPU 2301 ends the hit end time shortening rush effect when the end interval of the big hit game state transitioning to the special time saving game state ends regardless of whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is started.

The sub CPU 2301 constitutes a measuring means by having a built-in timer. Thereby, the sub CPU 2301 can measure the start timing and the end timing of the end interval of the big hit game state.

Furthermore, since the built-in timer can manage the time of various images performed in the short-time rush effect at the end of the hit, the hit result image, the alert image, the shield acquisition effect, the title image, and the game state transition image are predetermined. It can be executed sequentially according to the time.

In addition, the sub CPU 2301 displays the image and the title image related to the shield acquisition effect of the ceiling time saving rush effect and the image and the title image related to the shield acquisition effect of the hit end time saving rush effect on the display device 2007 in a common display mode. Alternatively, at least a part or all of them may be displayed on the display device 2007 in a common display mode.

Further, at least a part or all of the game state transition image of the ceiling time reduction rush effect and the game state transition image of the hit end time reduction rush effect may be displayed on the display device 2007 in a common display mode. The data capacity of the effect to be executed can be reduced by sharing a part or all of the effect executed by the ceiling time reduction rush effect and the hit end time reduction rush effect.

[5-4-4. Art run mode production]
As described above, when the gaming state shifts to the normal time-saving gaming state, the production state shifts to the art run mode. The art run mode corresponds to the third effect state in the present invention. In the art run mode, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the decorative symbol once for the one variable display of the second special symbol.

When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol in the art run mode becomes 3 or more, the sub CPU 2301 is decorated in the middle of each fluctuation period of the second special symbol, provided that the result of the hit determination process is "missing". The symbol is stopped and displayed, and a countdown effect is executed to notify the remaining number of fluctuations in the art run mode during the fixed stop period of the decorative symbol.

For example, if the result of the hit determination process is "missing" in the third variation period of the second special symbol in the art run mode, the sub CPU 2301 stops and displays the decorative symbol in the middle of the variation period of the second special symbol. Then, "Last 4" is displayed on the display device 2007 as the remaining number of fluctuations in the art run mode during the fixed stop period of the decorative symbol.

Further, if the result of the hit determination process is "missing" in the fourth change period of the second special symbol in the art run mode, the sub CPU 2301 stops and displays the decorative symbol in the middle of the change period of the second special symbol. Then, "LAST" is displayed on the display device 2007 as the remaining number of fluctuations in the art run mode during the fixed stop period of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the sub CPU 2301, the result of the hit determination process is "missing" in the fifth change period of the second special symbol in the art run mode, and the result of the hold determination process of the second special symbol hit. If all of them are "missing", the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle of the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, and "end" is displayed as the remaining number of fluctuations in the art run mode in the fixed stop period of the decorative symbol 2007. To display.

In addition, the remaining number of times display for notifying the remaining number of times in the art run mode different from the countdown effect is displayed at the lower left of the display device 2007. This remaining number of times display is displayed regardless of the hit determination result of the special symbol and the number of fluctuations.

That is, this remaining number of times display is displayed as "9" at the time of entering the art run mode, and is a display in which the numerical value is subtracted by 1 on condition that the symbol change of the second special symbol is started.

The effect executed in the art run mode may be an effect executed only in the art run mode, or an effect that can be executed in common in all game states (for example, a hold change effect). May be executed, or an effect that can be executed in common with the special time-saving game state described later (for example, the above-mentioned countdown effect) may be executed.

Further, the art run mode is a game mode in which fluctuations are performed by 9 fluctuations, and the normal time reduction game state in which this art run mode is executed is a game state in which the number of time reductions is set to 5.

That is, the normal time saving game state ends during the execution of the art run mode. Therefore, the game state controlled by the game state control means is controlled to the normal game state when the game-related effect (for example, the above-mentioned countdown effect) of the remaining fluctuation of the art run mode (for 4 hold) is being executed. Will be there.

That is, the art run mode is an effect mode in which both the normal time-saving game state and the normal game state can be controlled by the game state control means.

It should be noted that the final variation in the art run mode may be configured to vary depending on the design mode of the series of result display effects in the charge mode described later.

[5-4-5. Immediate mode production]
As described above, when the gaming state shifts to the special time-saving gaming state, the effect state shifts to the immediate continuous mode. The immediate mode corresponds to the first effect state in the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b), the sub CPU 2301 basically has a variation, a temporary stop, a re-variation, a fixed stop, etc. in each variation of the second special symbol in the immediate mode. Change the decorative pattern twice.

There are a plurality of patterns of variation of the decorative pattern in the immediate mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the immediate mode is a pattern in which the variation time and the re-variation time are the same, and a pattern in which the variation time and the re-variation time are different. There is. For example, in the variation pattern of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 95 (b), the re-variation time is longer than the variation time.

By doing so, the player feels as if the fluctuation is performed for a shorter time than the actual fluctuation, or the player feels that the lottery is received more than the actual number of fluctuations. Because it can be made to do so, it is possible to improve the interest.

As mentioned above, the immediate mode basically changes the decorative symbol twice, such as fluctuation, temporary stop, re-variation, and fixed stop, but special change that performs fixed stop without temporary stop. A pattern is provided. The special variation pattern is preferably a decorative pattern variation that is executed only when a big hit is made. Not limited to this, the special fluctuation pattern may be executed only at the time of loss, or may be configured to be executed at both the jackpot and the loss.

As shown in FIG. 95 (c), the number of times the decorative symbol is changed is not limited to two times, but may be three or more times for each change of the second special symbol. In this case, the number of times the symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variated in one variation in the immediate mode is determined by the sub CPU 2301 based on the variation time of the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 2201.

That is, when the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the long fluctuation time, the temporary stop and revariation are executed many times, while when the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time is determined by the main CPU 2201, the fluctuation pattern is short. Perform temporary stop and re-variation of the number of times.

Even if the fluctuation pattern of a long fluctuation time is determined by the main CPU 2201, the number of times of temporary stop and re-variation is executed by lengthening the time from the start of fluctuation or the start of re-variation to the temporary stop. It also has a case of reducing it.

In addition, the time from the re-variation of the symbol to the temporary stop has a plurality of patterns. That is, after executing a pattern with a long time from revariation to temporary stop, a pattern with a short time from revariation to temporary stop may be executed, or a pattern with a short time from revariation to temporary stop may be executed. After that, a pattern having a long time from re-variation to temporary stop may be executed, or the same pattern may be continuously executed. Further, a plurality of patterns may be similarly provided for the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol to the temporary stop.

By doing so, it becomes possible to diversify the production pattern during the re-variation, and thus it is possible to improve the interest.

The sub CPU 2301 notifies the result of the hit determination process (“big hit”, “feature open hit”, or “missing”) by stopping the determination of the decorative symbol in each change of the second special symbol in the immediate mode.

In addition, since the fixed stop mode of the decorative symbol is almost the same display mode for "big hit" and "feature opening hit", it seems that the player won the "big hit" or "feature opening hit". It is difficult to recognize whether or not you have won.

Further, the sub CPU 2301 determines the result of the hit determination process by setting the temporary stop to a definite stop without executing the re-variation after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol in each change of the second special symbol in the immediate mode. It can also be notified.

Further, the sub CPU 2301 can also develop the effect after the fixed stop in each variation of the second special symbol in the immediate continuous mode, and display the result of the final hit determination process on the display device 2007.

[5-4-5-1. Production state transition production]
As shown in FIG. 96, the sub CPU 2301 notifies that the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the charge mode when it is determined that the result of the hit determination process is not a "big hit" or a "feature open hit" during the immediate mode. Executes the effect state transition effect.

That is, the sub CPU 2301 executes the effect state transition effect when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol in the immediate mode is 8 and the result of the hit determination process for the 8th variation in the immediate mode is “missing”. do. Therefore, if the result of the hit determination process for the 8th variation in the immediate mode is "big hit" or "feature open hit", the effect state transition effect is not executed, so that the player has a special feeling of decorative pattern variation. Can be provided.

If the result of the hit determination process for the 8th variation in the immediate mode is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory", the effect executed in the 8th variation is executed in the 1st to 7th variations. You may perform a special effect that does not occur, or you may execute the same effect as the 1st to 7th variations.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the effect state transition effect, the sub CPU 2301 indicates that the immediate sequence mode has ended after the seventh variation of the symbol confirmation stop display (display example D1) in the immediate sequence mode. An immediate mode end image (display example D2), a charge mode transition image (display example D3) indicating that the effect state shifts to the charge mode, an effect explanation image (display example D4) explaining the effect in the charge mode, and a display example D4. , The initial image of the charge mode (display example D5) is sequentially or at least partially overlapped and displayed on the display device 2007.

For example, as shown in the display example D1 of FIG. 97, as the symbol confirmation stop display, the sub CPU 2301 stops and displays the first decorative symbol 2501 in the first area near the center of the display area of the display device 2007, and displays the display device 2007. The second decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed in the second area at the lower right of the display area of.

As shown in the display example D2, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display the immediate continuous mode end image 2503 instead of the first decorative symbol 2501.

As shown in the display example D3, when the display period of the immediate mode end image 2503 elapses, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display the charge mode transition image 2504 instead of the immediate mode end image 2503.

As shown in the display example D4 of FIG. 98, when the display period of the charge mode transition video 2504 elapses, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display the effect explanation video 2505 in place of the charge mode transition video 2504.

As shown in the display example D5, when the display period of the effect explanation image 2505 elapses, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display the initial image 2506 in the charge mode instead of the effect explanation image 2505.

It should be noted that the various images in the display examples D2 to D5 are images displayed when the 8th variation in the immediate mode is "missing", and the 8th variation in the immediate mode is "big hit" or "feature". It is a video display that will not be executed if you win the "open hit".

As shown in the display example D6, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 2301 stops and displays the second decorative symbol 2502 in a state where the initial image 2506 in the charge mode is displayed on the display device 2007. Let me.

The sub CPU 2301 continuously executes the effect state transition effect until the first variation display of the second special symbol in the charge mode is started. That is, the initial image 2506 in the charge mode continues to be displayed on the display device 2007 as shown in the display example D6 of FIG. 98 until the first variation display of the second special symbol in the charge mode is started.

That is, if the first special symbol is variablely displayed during the display of the initial image 2506 in the charge mode, the initial variable display of the initial image 2506 in the charge mode is continued and the first variable display of the second special symbol is started. The displayed contents are not changed until it is done.

By doing so, it becomes possible to clearly notify that the change of the second special symbol advantageous to the player has started. Therefore, any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is special. Since the player can easily grasp whether the change of the symbol has started, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest.

The condition for continuously executing the effect state transition effect is not limited to the start of the change of the second special symbol. For example, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 may be a condition, or the operation of the player to the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) may be detected by the main CPU 2201. It may be conditional on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 which is different from the above.

After displaying the image of the initial image 2506 (display example D6) in this charge mode on the display device 2007, the display device 2007 sets the charge effect described later on condition that the first variable display of the second special symbol is started. Display example D7 (see FIG. 101) in the above is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 99, the number of fluctuations of the reserved second special symbol is 4, the result of the hit determination processing for the fourth variation in the immediate mode and the four variations of the reserved second special symbol. If all the results of the hit determination process for the above are "missing", the sub CPU 2301 determines that the result of the hit determination process is not "big hit" and "feature open hit" during the immediate continuous mode, and is in the effect state. The execution of the transition effect may be started.

Similarly, even if the number of reserved fluctuations is 3, if the result of the hit determination processing for the 5th variation in the immediate mode and the result of the hit determination processing for the reserved 3 fluctuations are all "missing". , The sub CPU 2301 may determine that the result of the hit determination process is not a "big hit" or a "feature open hit" during the immediate continuous mode, and may start executing the effect state transition effect.

In this configuration, the sub CPU 2301 may perform variable display of the second decorative symbol 2502 with respect to the remaining variation of the second special symbol in the immediate mode during the period during which the effect state transition effect is being executed. During the period during which the effect state transition effect is being executed, the sub CPU 2301 may not perform variable display of the second decorative symbol 2502 with respect to the remaining variation of the second special symbol in the immediate mode.

[5-4-6. Charge mode production]
As described above, when the gaming state shifts to the special time-saving gaming state, the effect state shifts to the immediate continuous mode, and then shifts to the charge mode. The charge mode corresponds to the second effect state in the present invention.

In the charge mode, a series of result display effects for displaying the result of the hit determination processing for 5 fluctuations, which is a combination of the 1st variation of the 2nd special symbol and the 4 variations of the reserved 2nd special symbol, is executed.

In the charge mode, the sub CPU 2301 executes a series of result display effects over a plurality of sets when the result of the hit determination process is not "big hit" or "feature open hit".

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the sub CPU 2301 executes a series of result display effects over three sets. Therefore, the sub CPU 2301 executes the shield acquisition effect in the ceiling time reduction rush effect or the hit end time reduction rush effect so that the charge mode is started from the state where the three shield items are acquired.

If all the results of the hit determination process are "missing" in the series of result display effects for the three sets, the gaming state shifts from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state (see FIG. 81).

In addition, the shield item acquired by the shield acquisition effect only acquires the number corresponding to the number of executions of the series result display of the charge mode executed after that, so that 3 shield items are always acquired. It has become. Therefore, the shield item is a pseudo item acquisition effect that is acquired regardless of the number of holds, and the shield acquisition effect is executed without being affected by the number of holds and the change result of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the series of result display effects, the sub CPU 2301 executes a charge effect, an effect zone determination effect, various zone effects described later, and a result display effect during the variable display period of the first variation of the second special symbol. In the variable display period of the second to fifth variation of the second special symbol, the execution state of the result display effect is maintained.

[5-4-6-1. Charge production]
As shown in the display examples D7 to D11 of FIGS. 101 and 102, in the charge effect, the sub CPU 2301 displays the total hit expectation 2507 of the total hit expectation of the second special symbol before the fluctuation stop on the display device 2007. It is displayed, and the total hit expectation degree 2507 is updated every time the change of the second special symbol is suspended.

In the display examples D7 to D11, in addition to the total hit expectation 2507, the sub CPU 2301 displays the remaining time 2508 of the charge effect, the icon display unit 2509 indicating each of the reserved fluctuations, and the second decorative symbol 2502 on the display device 2007. Display.

The icon display unit 2509 is a display unit including a variable icon display unit 2509a indicating that it is changing, and a hold icon display unit 2509b indicating the number of hold items stored in the hold information storage means (main RAM 2203). ..

The display example D7 is a diagram showing a state in which the corresponding holding number of the second special symbol is 0. Here, only the variable icon display unit 2509a in the icon display unit 2509 is lit. This indicates that the second special symbol is changing. Further, the number of lights of the hold icon display unit 2509b in the icon display unit 2509 is 0.

The display example D8 shows a display example in which the number of holds is increased by one from the state of the display example D7. Here, the number of lights of the hold icon display unit 2509b is increased by one as compared with the display example D7, and the probability represented by the total hit expectation degree 2507 is increased by a predetermined number.

The display example D9 shows a display example in which the number of holds is increased by one from the state of the display example D8. Here, the number of lights of the hold icon display unit 2509b is increased by one as compared with the display example D8, and the probability represented by the total hit expectation degree 2507 is increased by a predetermined number.

The display example D10 shows a display example in which the number of holds is increased by one from the state of the display example D9. Here, the number of lights of the hold icon display unit 2509b is increased by one as compared with the display example D9, and the probability represented by the total hit expectation degree 2507 is increased by a predetermined number.

The display example D11 shows a display example in which the number of holds is increased by one from the state of the display example D9. Here, the number of lights of the hold icon display unit 2509b is increased by one as compared with the display example D9, and the probability represented by the total hit expectation degree 2507 is increased by a predetermined number. Further, the display of "first charge" is changed to the display of "standby completed", and it is possible to notify the player that the number of holds is full.

In the charge effect, the sub CPU 2301 displays the final total hit expectation 2507 on the display device 2007 as shown in the display example D12 of FIG. 102 after the fluctuation of the second special symbol for the four fluctuations is suspended. Let me. As described above, the effect of displaying the total hit expectation degree 2507 on the display device 2007 corresponds to the expectation degree suggestion effect in the present invention.

In the charge effect, each time the change of the second special symbol is suspended, the sub CPU 2301 displays the result of the hit determination process on each hold display of the icon display unit 2509 as a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit". Information indicating the degree of expectation of hitting may be displayed.

Further, in the charge effect, the sub CPU 2301 has 1 every time the total hit expectation 2507 is updated or the total hit expectation 2507 is updated when the four fluctuations of the second special symbol are suspended. Display on the display device 2007 according to the degree of expectation that there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination process is a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit" among the fluctuations and the fluctuations of the reserved second special symbol. May change the background color of the image.

In FIGS. 101 and 102, a display example is shown in which the total hit expectation 2507 is increased each time the number of holds stored in the hold information storage means (main RAM 2203) increases, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, a pattern may be provided that does not increase the total hit expectation 2507 even when the number of holds stored in the hold information storage means increases, or when the number of holds is full (display example). The total hit expectation 2507 may be increased only in D21).

[5-4-6-2. Production zone determination production]
When the charge effect is completed, the sub CPU 2301 executes an effect zone determination effect that determines one effect zone from the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, the volcano zone, and the god attack zone.

In the effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 has a "big hit" or "opening of a character" as a result of the hit determination process among the 5 variations of the 2nd special symbol (the 1st variation and the 4 variations of the reserved 2nd special symbol). The production zone is determined with a different probability (ratio) depending on whether or not there is a fluctuation that becomes a "hit".

For example, in the effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 has a second special when the result of the hit determination process is a "big hit" or a "feature open hit" among the five variations of the second special symbol. The fairy zone is selected with a higher probability than the case where there is no change in which the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory" among the five fluctuations of the symbol.

Further, in the effect zone determination effect, for example, if the sub CPU 2301 does not have a variation in which the result of the hit determination process is a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit" among the five variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 is the first. 2 Select the Shinto zone with a higher probability than when there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory" among the 5 variations of the special symbol.

Further, in the effect zone determination effect, for example, the sub CPU 2301 may have a variation of "big hit" or "feature opening hit" among the five fluctuations of the second special symbol, or "big hit" or "feature opening". Select a volcanic zone with the same or almost the same probability as when there is no fluctuation that becomes a "hit".

That is, in the fairy zone, there is a fluctuation that the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "opening of the character" among the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol. The expectation is higher than that of the Shinto zone and the volcano zone. The zone has a lower expectation than the fairy zone and the volcano zone, in which there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory" among the five fluctuations of the second special symbol.

The probability of selecting the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, and the volcano zone is not limited to this, and may be configured to be selected regardless of whether or not all of them are big hits, and the Shinto zone may be selected as a "big hit" or "big hit". It is also possible to select at a high rate when "hit the opening of the character".

Further, in the effect zone determination effect, for example, in the sub CPU 2301, the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "feature" among the four variations of the changing second special symbol and the reserved second special symbol. If there are two or more "open hit" fluctuations, you can select the god attack zone.

That is, in the effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 has a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit" as a result of the hit determination process among the four fluctuations of the changing second special symbol and the reserved second special symbol. If there are no more than one variation, the god attack zone will not be selected.

In the effect zone determination effect, the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) is urged to operate and the effect button 54 is operated while the symbols representing the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, the volcano zone, and the god attack zone are sequentially selected. There are a plurality of types of roulette effects in which the effect zone is determined according to the situation, and a normal effect in which the effect zone is determined without operating the effect button 54.

For example, it has an effect pattern that executes a roulette effect that displays a button image that prompts the button to be pressed, and an effect pattern that executes a roulette effect that does not display a button image, and the effect zone is determined by one of the effect patterns. The production is executed.

Further, the effect zone determination effect is configured so that it is easier to develop a zone effect with a high expectation when the button is pressed, and it is easy to develop a zone effect with a low expectation when the button is not pressed.

In a specific example described below, the sub CPU 2301 has a first effect zone determination effect that constitutes an effect pattern for executing an effect pattern that displays a button image, and a second effect that executes a normal effect without executing the roulette effect. Select one of the effect zone determination effect of the zone determination effect and the third effect zone determination effect that can execute the roulette effect for displaying the button image multiple times.

In the sub CPU 2301, there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "feature open hit" among the 5 variations of the 2nd special symbol (4 variations of the 1st variation and the reserved 2nd special symbol). One effect zone determination effect is determined from the first effect zone determination effect, the second effect zone determination effect, and the third effect zone determination effect with different probabilities (ratio) depending on the presence or absence.

In this example, in the first effect zone determination effect, the second effect zone determination effect, and the third effect zone determination effect, the second special symbol has five variations (the first variation and the reserved second special symbol have four variations). ), The probability that the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "feature open hit" is highest in the third effect zone determination effect and lowest in the second effect zone determination effect.

In addition, in the 1st effect zone determination effect, the 2nd effect zone determination effect, and the 3rd effect zone determination effect, 5 variations of the 2nd special symbol (4 variations of the 1st variation and the reserved 2nd special symbol) The probability that the result of the hit determination process will be "big hit" or "feature open hit" may be the highest in the first effect zone determination effect, or even if the second effect zone determination effect is the highest. good.

In addition, in the 1st effect zone determination effect, the 2nd effect zone determination effect, and the 3rd effect zone determination effect, 5 variations of the 2nd special symbol (4 variations of the 1st variation and the reserved 2nd special symbol) The probability that the result of the hit determination process will be a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit" may be the lowest in the first effect zone determination effect or the lowest in the third effect zone determination effect. good.

The roulette effect corresponds to the specific effect in the present invention, and the effect patterns of the first effect zone determination effect and the third effect zone determination effect correspond to the first specific effect execution pattern in the present invention, and the second effect zone determination. The effect pattern of the effect corresponds to the second specific effect execution pattern in the present invention.

[5-4-6-2-1. 1st production zone decision production]
As shown in the display example D21 of FIG. 103, in the first effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image in which the shutter display 2511 is closed with the second decorative symbol 2502 superimposed. The display example D21 is a display effect that can be transferred from the display example D12.

Next, the sub CPU 2301 displays an image in which the shutter display 2511 is released on the display device 2007, and as shown in the display example D22, various zone symbols representing the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, the volcano zone, and the god attack zone as a roulette effect. Along with the image in which 2512 is sequentially selected, the button image 2513 prompting the button press is displayed on the display device 2007.

The sub CPU 2301 displays on the display device 2007 an image in which a predetermined number (for example, 3) of the various zone symbols 2512 representing the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, the volcano zone, and the god attack zone are sequentially selected as the roulette effect. You may let it.

When the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the sub CPU 2301 stops the roulette effect as shown in the display example D23, and the effect selected by the roulette effect as shown in the display example D31 of FIG. 104. The image 2514 representing the zone is displayed on the display device 2007.

As described above, in the first effect zone determination effect, as shown in the display example D22 of FIG. 103, the sub CPU 2301 has an effect pattern for executing the roulette effect of displaying the button image 2513 as the roulette effect, and the button image. One of the effect patterns for executing the roulette effect that does not display 2513 may be executed.

When executing the roulette effect that does not display the button image 2513, the sub CPU 2301 stops the roulette effect as shown in the display example D23 of FIG. 103 after the lapse of a predetermined time, and is shown in the display example D31 of FIG. As described above, the display device 2007 displays the image 2514 (for example, the stop effect of the zone symbol indicating the transition destination zone) representing the effect zone selected by the roulette effect. The display example D31 shows an example in which the fairy zone is selected.

Further, in the first effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 has a relatively higher probability when the roulette effect that displays the button image 2513 is executed than when the roulette effect that does not display the button image 2513 is executed. Select a production zone with high expectations.

In addition to the default button image (for example, white button image), the displayed button image 2513 has a high hit expectation button image (for example, red button image) or a special symbol hit result of "big hit" or "big hit". It is also possible to display a button image (for example, a rainbow-colored button image) or the like that deterministically notifies the player that the character is open.

[5-4-6-2-2. 2nd production zone decision production]
As shown in the display example D41 of FIG. 105, in the second effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 suggests that the final total hit expectation 2507 displayed on the display device 2007 in the charge effect is further increased. The image 2521 is displayed on the display device 2007. The display example D41 is a display effect that can be transferred from the display example D12.

Next, as shown in the display example D42, the sub CPU 2301 has a hit expectation degree 2522 higher than the final total hit expectation degree 2507 (see display example D12 in FIG. 102) displayed on the display device 2007 by the charge effect. Display on the display device 2007.

In this way, when the second effect zone determination effect is not executed, the final total hit expectation 2507 (see display example D12 in FIG. 102) displayed on the display device 2007 by the charge effect is maintained, and the second effect zone determination effect is maintained. 2 When the effect zone determination effect is executed, the final total hit expectation 2507 (see display example D12 in FIG. 102) displayed on the display device 2007 by the charge effect is further increased.

The effect pattern when the second effect zone determination effect is not executed corresponds to the first expectation degree suggestion effect execution pattern in the present invention, and the effect pattern when the second effect zone determination effect is executed is the present invention. It corresponds to the second expectation degree suggestion effect execution pattern in the invention.

Next, as shown in the display example D43, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image in which the shutter display 2511 is closed with the second decorative symbol 2502 superimposed. Next, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image in which the shutter display 2511 is released, and causes the display device 2007 to display the symbol 2514 representing the determined effect zone as shown in the display example D31 of FIG. 104.

[5-4-6-2-3. 3rd production zone decision production]
As shown in the display example D51 of FIG. 106, in the sub CPU 2301, in addition to the various zone symbols 2512 representing the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, the volcano zone, and the god attack zone as the roulette effect, the continuation symbol 2531 representing "continuation" is sequentially added. The selected image is displayed, and the button image 2513 prompting the button press is displayed on the display device 2007.

When the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the sub CPU 2301 stops the roulette effect as shown in the display example D52. Here, when "continuation" is selected by the roulette effect, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image 2532 indicating that "continuation" is selected by the roulette effect, as shown in the display example D53. After that, the roulette effect is executed again as shown in the display example D54 of FIG.

The roulette effect (display example D54) executed after the continuation is not limited to the effect pattern displaying the same pattern as the roulette effect (display example D51) executed before the continuation. For example, after the continuation, the roulette effect may be executed with a pattern that hides the continuation symbol 2531, or the roulette effect is executed with a pattern that does not display the zone symbol with low expectation (the Shinto zone symbol in this embodiment). Alternatively, the roulette effect may be executed with a pattern that does not display both the continuous symbol 2531 and the zone symbol with low expectation.

The sub CPU 2301 displays an image in which a predetermined number (for example, 3) of symbols 2512 representing a fairy zone, a Shinto zone, a volcano zone, a god attack zone, and a continuation are sequentially selected as a roulette effect. It may be displayed in.

When an effect zone other than "continuation" is selected by the roulette effect shown in the display example D54 of FIG. 107 as shown in the display example D55, the sub CPU 2301 is selected by the roulette effect as shown in the display example D56. The image 2514 representing the produced effect zone is displayed on the display device 2007. The display example D56 shows an example in which the god attack zone is selected.

Even when an effect zone other than "continue" is selected by the roulette effect shown in the display example D51 of FIG. 106, the sub CPU 2301 is selected by the roulette effect as shown in the display example D31 or the display example D56. The image 2514 representing the effect zone is displayed on the display device 2007.

As described above, in the third effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 executes a roulette effect of displaying the button image 2513 as the roulette effect as shown in the display example D51 of FIG. 106 and the display example D54 of FIG. 107. Either the effect pattern to be performed or the effect pattern to execute the roulette effect that does not display the button image 2513 may be executed.

When executing the roulette effect that does not display the button image 2513, the sub CPU 2301 stops the roulette effect as shown in the display example D52 of FIG. 106 and the display example D55 of FIG. 107 after a predetermined time elapses. As shown in the display example D56, the image 2514 representing the effect zone selected by the roulette effect is displayed on the display device 2007.

Further, in the third effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 has a relatively higher probability when the roulette effect that displays the button image 2513 is executed than when the roulette effect that does not display the button image 2513 is executed. Select the production zone or "continue" with high expectation.

In addition to the default button image (for example, white button image), the displayed button image 2513 has a high hit expectation button image (for example, red button image) or a special symbol hit result of "big hit" or "big hit". It is also possible to display a button image (for example, a rainbow-colored button image) or the like that deterministically notifies the player that the character is open.

[5-4-6-3. Various zone production]
When the effect zone determination effect is completed, the sub CPU 2301 executes the effect of the effect zone determined by the effect zone determination effect. In some cases, the sub CPU 2301 determines the effect zone without executing the effect zone determination effect, and executes the effect of the determined effect zone. Production zone determination The production of the production zone determined by the production, that is, the production of the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, the volcano zone, and the god attack zone corresponds to the predetermined production in the present invention.

[5-4-6-3-1. Fairy Zone Direction]
In the production of the fairy zone, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like, the sub CPU 2301 displays the first decorative symbol 2501 in the first area near the center of the display area of the display device 2007, and displays the first decorative symbol 2501 in the lower right of the display area of the display device 2007. The second decorative symbol 2502 is displayed in the second area of the above, and the zone display unit 2541 indicating the zone in which the player is staying is displayed in the third area on the upper left of the display area of the display device 2007.

In the production of the fairy zone, the first decorative symbol 2501 indicates whether or not there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "opening of the character" among the five variations of the second special symbol. The second decorative symbol 2502 is linked with the second special symbol. The first decorative symbol 2501 corresponds to the specific symbol in the present invention, and the second decorative symbol 2502 corresponds to the predetermined symbol in the present invention.

FIGS. 108 and 109 show display examples when the results of the special symbol hit determination processing for the five fluctuations of the second special symbol are all "missing". At the time of the first variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 as shown in the display example D61 of FIG. 108.

As shown in the display example D61, the fairy zone is configured to include at least a zone display unit 2541, an area for displaying the first decorative symbol 2501, and an area for displaying the second decorative symbol 2502. Similarly, the volcano zone, the Shinto zone, and the Shinto zone, which will be described later, are configured to include at least a zone display unit 2541, an area for displaying the first decorative symbol 2501, and an area for displaying the second decorative symbol 2502. There is.

At the time of the stop display of the first fluctuation of the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 puts the first decorative symbol 2501 in the temporary stop display state and displays the second decorative symbol 2502 as a fixed stop display (as shown in the display example D62). Hereinafter, it is also simply referred to as a stop display).

In addition, the temporary stop display notifies the player that the symbol is in the temporary stop state by displaying the symbol swaying up and down or displaying a slight movement (see the first decorative symbol 2501 of the display example D62), and the fixed stop display is displayed. Does not display up and down (see the second decorative symbol 2502 of the display example D62 and the first decorative symbol 2501 of the display example D65) to notify the player that the display is a fixed stop display. ..

At the time of the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol (the first variation of the hold stored in the hold storage means), the sub CPU 2301 sets the first decorative symbol 2501 to the temporary stop display as shown in the display example D63. While maintaining the state, the second decorative symbol 2502 is variablely displayed.

At the time of the stop display of the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol (the first variation of the hold stored in the hold storage means), the sub CPU 2301 performs the first decorative symbol as shown in the display example D64 of FIG. The second decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed while the 2501 is maintained in the temporary stop display state.

Display example 64 shows an example in which the symbol modes of the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 are different (asynchronous), but the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol (stored in the reserved storage means). Even if the stop display is the first variation of the hold, the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 may be controlled so that the symbol modes are the same (synchronized).

At each change from the 3rd to the 5th change of the 5th change of the 2nd special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 displays the 1st decorative symbol 2501 as a temporary stop display as in the case of the 2nd change of the 5th change of the 2nd special symbol. In the maintained state, the second decorative symbol 2502 is variablely displayed.

At the time of the stop display of the fifth change of the fifth change of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 stops and displays the first decorative symbol 2501 maintained in the temporary stop display state as shown in the display example D65, and the second The decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the second decorative symbol 2502 at the time of the stop display of the fifth variation of the fifth variation of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 2501 may be displayed as a temporary stop. 1 The decorative symbol 2501 may be configured so as not to temporarily stop and display at all.

In FIGS. 108 and 109, as shown in the display example D62, an example in which the sub CPU 2301 executes the result display effect by setting the first decorative symbol 2501 to the temporary stop display state has been described, but FIGS. 110 and 111 have been described. As shown in the above, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image (hereinafter, also referred to as “missing image”) that explicitly represents “loss” after the first decorative symbol 2501 is put into the temporary stop display state. The result display effect may be executed.

The display examples D71 to D75 shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 correspond to the display examples D61 to D65 shown in FIGS. 108 and 109. That is, at the time of the stop display of the first fluctuation of the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 puts the first decorative symbol 2501 into the temporary stop display state and puts the first decorative symbol 2501 into the temporary stop display state as shown in the display example D72 of FIG. 110, and the second decorative symbol 2502. Is stopped and displayed, and then, in the display examples D73 to D75, the lost image 2542 is displayed in the first area instead of the first decorative symbol 2501.

The loss image 2542 is an image including a zone end image display unit 2542a indicating that the zone effect being executed ends, and an acquired game medium number notification unit 2542b for notifying the player of the acquired game medium number. ..

The lost image 2542 is not limited to the one composed only of the zone end image display unit 2542a and the acquired game medium number notification unit 2542b, and various information (for example, display of titles related to the acquired number of game media) and display of titles related to the acquired number of game media are displayed. It may be configured to display the setting suggestion display) for suggesting the setting value of the gaming machine to the player.

The sub CPU 2301 causes the lost image 2542 to be displayed in the first area in the display examples D73 to D75 so as to be superimposed on the first decorative symbol 2501 shown in the display examples D63 to D65 of FIGS. 108 and 109. You may.

Further, when the fairy zone is selected for the first set or the second set of the series result display effect, the sub CPU 2301 executes the fairy zone effect as shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, and displays the series result. When the fairy zone is selected in the third set of the effect, the effect of the fairy zone may be executed as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111.

FIGS. 112 to 114 show display examples when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing for the third variation of the five variations of the second special symbol is "big hit" or "feature opening hit". .. At the time of the first variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 changes and displays the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 as shown in the display example D81 of FIG. 112.

At the time of the stop display of the first fluctuation of the 5 fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 temporarily stops the 1st decorative symbol 2501 in a mode indicating "big hit" or "feature opening hit" as shown in display example D82. The display state is set, and the second decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating "missing".

At the time of the second change of the 5 changes of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 changes and displays the second decorative symbol 2502 in a state where the first decorative symbol 2501 is maintained in the temporary stop display as shown in the display example D83. ..

At the time of the stop display of the second fluctuation of the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 keeps the first decorative symbol 2501 in the temporary stop display state as shown in the display example D84 of FIG. 113, and the second The decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating "loss".

At the time of the third change of the 5 changes of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 changes and displays the second decorative symbol 2502 while maintaining the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol 2501 as shown in the display example D85. ..

At the time of the stop display of the third fluctuation of the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 stops and displays the first decorative symbol 2501 maintained in the temporary stop display state as shown in the display example D86, and "hits". The second decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating "a hit with the opening of the accessory".

In the display example D86, the symbol that is stopped and displayed by the second decorative symbol 2502 is preferably the same symbol as the symbol that is temporarily stopped or displayed by the first decorative symbol 2501. If they are the same, the player can grasp the type of "big hit" or "feature opening hit" that shifts according to the symbol in advance before the change, so that the feeling of extension during the game can be reduced. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

After that, as shown in the display example D87 of FIG. 114, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a hit image 2543 representing a “big hit” or a “feature opening hit” as a result display effect. In addition, the display example D87 shows a hit image 2543 representing a “feature opening hit”, and the hit image 2543 representing a “big hit” has a different mode from the display example D87 (for example, “big hit !! Aim at the attacker on the right!”! Is displayed on the display device 2007.

Even if it is a "big hit", a hit image 2543 showing a "feature opening hit" as shown in D87 may be displayed. In this case, since it becomes possible to eliminate the distinction between "big hit" and "opening of the character", it is interesting to win a hit with a low profit margin (for example, "opening of the character"). It will be possible to prevent the decline.

In this example, since the result of the special symbol hit determination processing for the third variation of the 5 variations of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" or "feature opening hit", the 2 fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol are It remains on hold.

That is, the two fluctuations of the second special symbol are suspended and stopped and displayed in the immediate mode after the end of the big hit. If the V prize is not won during the "winning of the character opening", the hold will be changed or stopped in any of the various zone effects according to the expected degree of hit for the remaining two hold times.

In the display example D87, the second decorative symbol 2502 is not displayed, but the display of the second decorative symbol 2502 may be maintained.

FIGS. 115 to 116 show display examples when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing for the second variation of the five variations of the second special symbol is "big hit" or "feature opening hit". .. In the example shown in FIGS. 115 to 116, as shown in the display example D73 of FIG. 110, an example of a revival effect in which the lost image 2542 is displayed in the first area and then the hit image 2543 is displayed in the first area. Shows.

As shown in the display example D91 of FIG. 115, the sub CPU 2301 variablely displays the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 at the time of the first variation of the five variations of the second special symbol, and as shown in the display example D92. At the time of the stop display of the first change of the 5 changes of the second special symbol, the first decorative symbol 2501 is put into the temporary stop display state, and the second decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed.

After the second decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed, as shown in the display example D93, the sub CPU 2301 displays the lost image 2542 in the first area and causes the second decorative symbol 2502 to be variablely displayed. When the second decorative symbol 2502 is variablely displayed, the sub CPU 2301 displays the resurrection suggestion image 2544 suggesting that the resurrection effect is executed in the first region, as shown in the display example D94 of FIG. 116.

In the revival effect, at the time of the second stop display of the 5 fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 is the first decoration in the manner of expressing "big hit" or "feature opening hit" as shown in the display example D95. The symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 are stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in the display example D96, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a hit image 2543 representing a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit" as a result display effect. In addition, the display example D96 shows a hit image 2543 representing a "feature opening hit", and the hit image 2543 representing a "big hit" has a different mode from the display example D96 (for example, "big hit !! Aim at the right attacker!" Is displayed on the display device 2007.

Even if it is a "big hit", a hit image 2543 showing a "feature opening hit" as shown in D87 may be displayed. In this case, since it becomes possible to eliminate the distinction between "big hit" and "opening of the character", it is interesting to win a hit with a low profit margin (for example, "opening of the character"). It will be possible to prevent the decline.

In this example, since the result of the special symbol hit determination processing for the second variation of the 5 variations of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" or "feature opening hit", the 3 fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol are It remains on hold.

That is, the two fluctuations of the second special symbol are suspended and stopped and displayed in the immediate mode after the end of the big hit. If the V prize is not won during the "winning of the character opening", the hold will be changed or stopped in any of the various zone effects according to the expected degree of hit for the remaining two hold times.

In the display example D96, the second decorative symbol 2502 is not displayed, but the display of the second decorative symbol 2502 may be maintained.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination processing for the third variation of the 5 variations of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory", the lost image 2542 is changed to 3 of the 5 variations of the 2nd special symbol. The display may be continued until the fluctuation for the fluctuation is started, or the loss image 2542 is hidden from the loss image 2542 when the second fluctuation of the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol is started, and the revival effect is performed. You may try to do it.

Further, the revival effect may be executed while the lost image 2542 is displayed. In this case, the display area for displaying the lost image 2542 and the display area for displaying the resurrection suggestion image 2544 may be executed in different display areas, or the lost image 2542 and the resurrection suggestion image 2544 are superimposed. You may try to execute as follows.

In FIGS. 117 to 119, when the production of the fairy zone is started, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol held is less than 4, and the second special symbol being changed and the second special symbol being changed are reserved. The result of the hit judgment process for the special symbol is all "missing", and the result of the hit determination process for the change of the second special symbol held after the production of the fairy zone is started is "big hit" or "feature opening hit". A display example is shown.

In the production of the fairy zone started when the number of reserved changes of the second special symbol is 1, the sub CPU 2301 is the first as shown in the display example D101 of FIG. 117 at the time of the first change of the second special symbol. The decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 are variablely displayed.

At the start of the fairy zone production, the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol that is changing and the second special symbol that has been suspended is "missing", so when the stop display of the first change in the fairy zone is displayed, As shown in the display example D102, the first decorative symbol 2501 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a lost manner, and the second decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed.

At the time of the second change of the 5 changes of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 changes and displays the second decorative symbol 2502 in a state where the first decorative symbol 2501 is maintained in the temporary stop display as shown in the display example D103. ..

At the time of the stop display of the second fluctuation of the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 keeps the first decorative symbol 2501 in the temporary stop display state as shown in the display example D104 of FIG. 118, and the second The decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed.

At the time of the third fluctuation of the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 changes and displays the second decorative symbol 2502 in a state where the first decorative symbol 2501 is maintained in the temporary stop display as shown in the display example D105. ..

In this example, the variation of the second special symbol (the third variation of the second special symbol) is newly suspended and newly suspended after the production of the fairy zone is started and before the display example D105 is displayed. It is assumed that the result of the hit determination process for the fluctuation is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory".

In this case, at the time of the third stop display of the 5 fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol, as shown in the display example D106, the sub CPU 2301 has the first decorative symbol 2501 and The second decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the display example D106, a display example in which both the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 are changed to represent "big hit" or "opening of the accessory" is shown, but the display example is not limited to this. .. For example, while only the second decorative symbol 2502 is set to represent "big hit" or "feature opening hit", the first decorative symbol 2501 is not set to represent "big hit" or "feature opening hit". It may be configured to stop and display the previous mode (a mode representing "loss"), or the first decorative symbol 2501 may be hidden and only the second decorative symbol 2502 may be displayed.

After that, as shown in the display example D107 of FIG. 119, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a hit image 2543 representing a “big hit” or a “feature opening hit” as a result display effect.

In addition, the display example D107 shows a hit image 2543 representing a "feature opening hit", and the hit image 2543 representing a "big hit" has a different mode from the display example D107 (for example, "big hit !! Aim at the right attacker!" Is displayed on the display device 2007.

Even if it is a "big hit", a hit image 2543 showing a "feature opening hit" as shown in D87 may be displayed. In this case, since it becomes possible to eliminate the distinction between "big hit" and "opening of the character", it is interesting to win a hit with a low profit margin (for example, "opening of the character"). It will be possible to prevent the decline.

In the display example D107, the second decorative symbol 2502 is not displayed, but the display of the second decorative symbol 2502 may be maintained.

In the above-mentioned example, the result of the hit determination process for the newly reserved variation (third variation of the second special symbol) after the production of the fairy zone is started and before the display example D105 is displayed is ". In the case of "missing", the sub CPU 2301 maintains the first decorative symbol 2501 in the temporarily stopped display state in the form of loss at the time of the third stop display of the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol 2502. Is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 109).

[5-4-6-3-2. Shinto zone production]
In the production of the Shinto zone, the sub CPU 2301 has the result of the hit determination processing among the five variations of the design representing the development destination of the production, the production zone transition symbol indicating the transition to another production zone, and the second special symbol. The result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "opening of the character" among the five fluctuations of the expectation symbol indicating the degree of expectation that there is a fluctuation of "big hit" or "opening of the character" and the second special symbol. Each symbol of the first decorative symbol 2501 is changed to a hit symbol or the like indicating that there is a variation of "hit", the decorative symbol is variably displayed, and an effect according to the result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

For example, when the sub CPU 2301 displays three identical hit symbols side by side as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" among the five variations of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the display device 2007 is made to display an image showing whether or not there is a fluctuation that is "a hit when the accessory is opened".

Further, when the three identical effect zone transition symbols are displayed side by side as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the effect zone corresponding to the effect zone transition symbol. For example, when the transition symbols representing the fairy zones are displayed side by side as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the sub CPU 2301 executes the effect of the fairy zone.

The relationship between the temporary stop display and the stop display of the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 in the Shinto zone, and the relationship between the display of the lost image 2542 and the revival effect are shown in FIGS. 108 to 119. It is executed in the same or substantially the same manner as the display example shown. However, in the Shinto zone, the zone display unit 2541 is displayed as "Shinto zone".

[5-4-6-3-3. Volcano zone production]
In the production of the volcano zone, the sub CPU 2301 executes the variable display of the first decorative symbol 2501 a plurality of times (for example, 5 to 10 times), and the result of the hit determination process is obtained among the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol. The display device 2007 is displayed with icon images corresponding to the number of "big hits" or "feature opening hits".

In the production of the volcano zone, when the variable display of the first decorative symbol 2501 is completed, the sub CPU 2301 becomes a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit" in the five fluctuations of the second special symbol. An image showing whether or not there is a fluctuation is displayed on the display device 2007.

The relationship between the temporary stop display and the stop display of the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 in the volcano zone, and the relationship between the display of the lost image 2542 and the revival effect are shown in FIGS. 108 to 119. It is executed in the same or substantially the same manner as the display example shown. However, in the volcano zone, the zone display unit 2541 is displayed as "volcano zone".

[5-4-6-3-4. Directing the god attack zone]
In FIGS. 120 and 121, a display example of the effect of the god attack zone is shown. At the time of the first variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol in the effect of the god attack zone, the sub CPU 2301 promotes the continuous operation of the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) as shown in the display example D111 of FIG. 120. Image 2551 and the second decorative symbol 2502 are displayed on the display device 2007.

Next, as shown in the display example D112, the sub CPU 2301 changes the image of the first aspect for promoting continuous operation of the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) into the image 2552 of the second aspect, and the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1). ), And the number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations) in which the result of the hit determination processing is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory" out of the 5 fluctuations of the second special symbol and the gauge showing the remaining time that can be continuously operated. The number of hit images 2553 to be represented is further displayed on the display device 2007.

The hit number image 2553 represents 0 at the beginning of display. As shown in the display example D113 and the display example D114 of FIG. 121, the sub CPU 2301 increases the number represented by the hit number image 2553 by 1 according to the continuous operation of the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1).

As described above, in the production of the god attack zone, the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "opening of the character" among the four fluctuations of the second special symbol that is changing and the second special symbol that is reserved. Since it is an effect executed when there are two or more fluctuations, the number of hit image 2553 is finally 2 or more and 5 or less.

At the time of stop display of the first fluctuation of the 5 fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol, as shown in the display example D115, the sub CPU 2301 determines that the result of the hit determination processing among the 5 fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" or "combination". The display device 2007 displays the winning number image 2554 showing the number of fluctuations that are "per opening of an object".

Here, the sub CPU 2301 may display the first decorative symbol 2501 on the display device 2007 in addition to the winning number image 2554. In this case, the sub CPU 2301 may display the winning number image 2554 on the display device 2007 so as to be superimposed on the first decorative symbol 2501. Further, the hit number image 2553 may be continuously displayed from the display example D114 to the display example D115.

After displaying the hit acquisition number image 2554, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display the hit image 2543 representing the “big hit” or the “feature opening hit” as the result display effect, as shown in the display example D116.

In addition, the display example D116 shows a hit image 2543 representing a "feature opening hit", and the hit image 2543 representing a "big hit" has a different mode from the display example D116 (for example, "big hit !! Aim at the right attacker!" Is displayed on the display device 2007.

Even if it is a "big hit", a hit image 2543 showing a "feature opening hit" as shown in D87 may be displayed. In this case, since it becomes possible to eliminate the distinction between "big hit" and "opening of the character", it is interesting to win a hit with a low profit margin (for example, "opening of the character"). It will be possible to prevent the decline.

In the display example D107, the second decorative symbol 2502 is not displayed, but the display of the second decorative symbol 2502 may be maintained.

[5-4-7. Special production of time-saving game state]
In the time-saving game state, the sub CPU 2301 has either "big hit" or "feature open hit" selected for the changing second special symbol, and either the reserved second special symbol has been changed. When "Big hit" or "Character open hit" is selected, SP reach (hereinafter, also referred to as "special production") is performed in any of the production modes of art run mode, immediate continuous mode, and charge mode. Can be done.

As special effects, special effects that can be executed in all the effect modes of art run mode, immediate mode, and charge mode, and special effects that can be executed in one effect mode but not in the other two effect modes, and There are special effects that can be performed in two effect modes and not in the other one effect mode.

[5-4-7-1. Hold rendition]
Hereinafter, a hold continuous effect, which is a special effect that can be executed in the charge mode and is not executed in the art run mode and the immediate continuous mode, will be described.

The pending continuous effect is determined by the fact that 10 rounds of "big hit" or "feature opening hit" is selected for the second special symbol that is being changed, and that the second special symbol that is on hold is changed. It is an effect that the execution condition is that "big hit" or "opening hit" of 10 rounds is selected for the fluctuation of the number (in this example, 2) or more.

The sub CPU 2301 can execute the hold continuous effect if the execution condition is satisfied while executing the zone effect of any of the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, and the volcano zone in the charge mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 122, when the sub CPU 2301 is executing the zone effect of the Shinto zone in the charge mode, the display screen of the display device 2007 is turned off and a message such as "Please stop left" is displayed. Display on the display device 2007. When the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) is operated within the valid period, the sub CPU 2301 stops and displays the left decorative symbol among the three decorative symbols that are variablely displayed.

When the decorative symbol on the left is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 2301 displays a message such as "Please stop inside" on the display device 2007. When the effect button 54 is operated within the valid period, the sub CPU 2301 stops and displays the decorative symbol inside.

When the decorative symbol inside is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 2301 displays a message such as "Please stop right" on the display device 2007. When the effect button 54 is operated within the valid period, the sub CPU 2301 stops and displays the decorative symbol on the right.

As a result, the decorative symbol is displayed on the display device 2007 in a state where three special symbols (for example, "G") are arranged side by side. The sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a special symbol formation image related to the effect to be executed when three special symbols are lined up.

If the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) is not operated within each valid period, the sub CPU 2301 may display each decorative symbol on the display device 2007 after the valid period ends, and is on hold. You may end (cancel) the continuous production.

It should be noted that the hold continuous production is not limited to the one executed when the fluctuation during execution is won as a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit". For example, the fluctuation during execution is "missing", but the execution is performed on the condition that there are a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more of the pending fluctuations of the second special symbol. May be.

In this case, the hold continuous effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the changing second special symbol has won the "big hit" or the "feature open hit", so that the range of the execution timing of the hold continuous effect is wide. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a more special feeling.

Although the hold continuous effect is not executed in the art run mode and the immediate continuous mode, it may be configured to be executed in either or both modes.

In addition, the hold continuous production may be executed in the god attack zone. In this case, the player can recognize that the player wins the "big hit" or the "opening of the character" more than once by entering the god attack zone, and then the "big hit" is performed by executing the hold continuous production. Since the player can recognize that he / she has won three or more times in "per opening of the character", it becomes possible to provide the player with a more special effect. You can improve your interest.

[5-4-7-2. Full rotation production]
The full rotation effect, which is a special effect that can be executed in the charge mode and is not executed in the art run mode and the immediate mode, will be described below. The full rotation effect can be executed even in a normal gaming state, and constitutes the first suggested effect in the present invention.

For the full rotation effect, "big hit" or "feature opening hit" is selected for the second special symbol that is changing, and at least one or more of the reserved changes in the second special symbol. It is a so-called definite effect that the execution condition is that "big hit" or "feature opening hit" is selected for the fluctuation of.

The sub CPU 2301 can execute the full rotation effect at any timing as long as the execution conditions are satisfied in the art run mode and the immediate continuous mode. Further, the sub CPU 2301 executes the full rotation effect if the execution condition is satisfied when executing the zone effect of any of the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, the volcano zone, and the god attack zone in the charge mode. Can be done.

In the full rotation effect, the sub CPU 2301 performs a freeze effect that delays the timing of starting the fluctuation of the three decorative symbols for a certain period of time, and then displays the three decorative symbols in a state where the same symbols are aligned for at least a part of the period. The variable display is performed, and the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed while the same symbols are aligned.

Since the full rotation effect is executed after the special feeling by the freeze effect is produced, the effect that can emphasize to the player that "big hit" or "feature open hit" is selected is executed. be able to.

The sub CPU 2301 may execute the full rotation effect on the condition that a "big hit" capable of shifting to the special time-saving gaming state is selected for the fluctuating first special symbol even in the normal gaming state. .. In this case, the sub CPU 2301 is at the start of the fourth re-variation of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-continuous effect that makes it appear as if the re-variation display of the decorative symbol is repeated a plurality of times during the one special symbol variation display period. It is possible to execute a full rotation effect.

When executing the full rotation effect in the normal game state, it is possible to execute it on condition that the first special symbol or the second special symbol being changed is selected as "big hit" or "feature open hit". It is not a condition whether or not there is a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit" in the pending fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, when the full rotation effect is executed in the normal game state, the execution conditions are different from the case where the full rotation effect is executed in the charge mode.

Further, the full rotation effect is configured to be feasible during the fluctuation of the special symbol that executes the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction precursor effect. In other words, it is configured so that both the full rotation effect and the ceiling time reduction precursor effect can be executed during the fluctuation of one special symbol.

In this case, the full rotation effect may be executed after the ceiling time reduction precursor effect is executed, or the ceiling time reduction precursor effect may be executed after the full rotation effect is executed. Further, the ceiling time reduction precursor effect and the full rotation effect may be configured to be executed in full or at least a part of each other.

It should be noted that the full rotation effect executed in the normal gaming state is not limited to the start of the fourth re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, it may be executed via the freeze effect when the normal reach occurs, or may be executed via the freeze effect after the SP reach loss.

In this case, since it becomes possible to execute the full rotation effect at a plurality of timings, the player can play with a sense of expectation at all the fluctuating timings.

It should be noted that the full rotation effect may be configured to suggest to the player that the hit expectation is high. That is, it is possible to execute an effect pattern in which "missing" is displayed after the execution of the full rotation effect, without necessarily shifting to the "big hit" or the "opening of the accessory" after the effect of the full rotation effect is executed.

[5-5. Various effects]
As described above, the fourth pachinko gaming machine can change the effect state of the special time-saving game state by shifting the effect state to the charge mode when it fluctuates by 8 in the immediate continuous mode in the special time-saving game state. Due to the diversification, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game.

Further, the fourth pachinko gaming machine immediately changes the effect state when either the first condition established when the big hit ends or the second condition established when the B time reduction is reached is satisfied. By shifting to the continuous mode, the conditions for shifting to the special time-saving gaming state have been diversified, so that it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game.

In addition, the fourth pachinko gaming machine has diversified the production state of the time-saving gaming state after the end of the big hit by shifting the production state to either the immediate mode or the art run mode after the end of the big hit. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of a person's game.

Further, when the fourth pachinko gaming machine shifts the effect state from the immediate mode to the charge mode, the fourth pachinko gaming machine continues the effect state transition effect until the first variation display of the second special symbol in the charge mode is started. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the effect mode has changed from the immediate mode to the charge mode.

Further, in the charge mode, the fourth pachinko gaming machine executes a series of result display effect of displaying the result of the hit determination process summarizing the five fluctuations of the second special symbol, so that the fourth pachinko gaming machine performs once by the series result display effect. Since the expectation that the result of the hit determination process will be a "big hit" or a "feature open hit" is increased, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game.

Further, the fourth pachinko gaming machine can execute a special effect according to the effect mode, such as not executing the hold continuous effect as a special effect that can be executed in the charge mode in the immediate mode.

Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, depending on whether or not there is a change in the charge mode in which the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "opening of the accessory" among the five fluctuations of the second special symbol. By deciding one production zone from the fairy zone, Shinto zone, volcano zone, and god attack zone with a high probability, the production state of the charge mode is diversified, which reduces the player's interest in playing. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the series of result display effects, the fourth pachinko gaming machine stops and displays the first decorative symbol 2501 for the five variations of the second special symbol, while the second decorative symbol for the five variations of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Since the 2502 is variably displayed, the player can be shown the result of each of the five variations of the second special symbol.

Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the production of the fairy zone was started, the number of fluctuations of the reserved second special symbol was less than 4, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the fluctuation was suspended. The result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is all "missing", and the result of the hit determination process for the change of the second special symbol held after the production of the fairy zone is started is "big hit" or "feature". In the case of "open hit", the first decorative symbol 2501 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a lost manner until the second special symbol is suspended after the fairy zone production is started, and the fairy zone production is performed. When the fluctuation of the second special symbol held after the start is stopped, the first decorative symbol 2501 is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating "big hit" or "feature opening hit".

Therefore, the fourth pachinko gaming machine does not cause inconsistency in the production mode even if the number of fluctuations of the reserved second special symbol is less than 4 when the production of the fairy zone is started. You can perform the production of the fairy zone.

Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in the effect zone determination effect, the first effect zone determination effect and the third effect zone determination effect constituting the effect pattern for executing the roulette effect that displays the button image 2513 for prompting the button press are combined. Since any of the second effect zone determination effects that do not execute the roulette effect that displays the button image 2513 that prompts the button press is executed, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the second effect zone determination effect is not executed in the charge effect, the final total hit expectation 2507 displayed on the display device 2007 in the charge effect is maintained. When the first expectation degree suggestion effect execution pattern is executed and the second effect zone determination effect is executed, the final total hit expectation degree 2507 displayed on the display device 2007 by the charge effect is further increased. By executing the expectation degree suggestion effect execution pattern, the effect of expressing the hit expectation degree in the charge effect is diversified, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in the charge mode, by executing a series of result display effects of a plurality of sets, the result display effects are executed a plurality of times, which reduces the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, the fourth pachinko gaming machine is in a gaming state when either the first condition that is satisfied when the hit ends or the second condition that is established when the B time reduction is reached is satisfied. By shifting to the special time-saving gaming state, the conditions for shifting to the special time-saving gaming state are diversified, so that it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game.

Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the variation pattern table selected during the special time-saving gaming state is a variation pattern corresponding to the time-saving table numbers 1 and 2 selected when the gaming state shifts to the special time-saving gaming state. And a table of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the time saving table numbers 3 to 5 in which a predetermined number of special symbols are selected based on the table of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the time saving table numbers 1 and 2. including.

Therefore, the fourth pachinko gaming machine can execute an effect according to the number of games in the special time-saving game state by changing the time-saving table number selected during the special time-saving game state.

In addition, the fourth pachinko gaming machine suggests to the player that the normal gaming state is to be changed to the special time-saving gaming state by the full-rotation effect and the ceiling time-saving precursor effect, which reduces the player's interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

In addition, the fourth pachinko gaming machine displays a video and a title video related to the shield acquisition effect of the ceiling time-saving rush effect and a video and a title image related to the shield acquisition effect of the hit end time-shortened rush effect in a common display mode 2007. Since it is displayed on the ceiling, the memory capacity required to store the data related to the effect can be reduced.

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of operations n related to the B time reduction, the fourth pachinko gaming machine executes the ceiling time reduction rush effect until the first variation display of the special symbol in the B time reduction is executed. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize the change of the first special symbol in the B time reduction.

In addition, when the jackpot gaming state that shifts to the special time-saving gaming state ends, the fourth pachinko gaming machine starts the end interval of the jackpot gaming state that shifts to the special time-saving gaming state regardless of the fluctuation state of the special symbol. Occasionally, in order to execute the hit end time shortening rush effect, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the gaming state shifts to the special time saving gaming state before the gaming state shifts from the big hit gaming state to the special time saving gaming state. can.

In addition, when the jackpot gaming state that shifts to the special time saving gaming state ends, the fourth pachinko gaming machine performs a hit ending time shortening rush effect before the gaming state shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the special time saving gaming state. When the number of changes of the special symbol reaches the number of operations n related to the B time reduction, the ceiling time reduction rush effect is executed during the first variation display of the special symbol in the B time reduction, so that the gaming state is the special time reduction gaming state. It is possible to make the player aware of the transition to.

Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of operations n related to the B time reduction, the warning image is not displayed on the display device 2007, so that the ceiling time reduction rush effect becomes longer. It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game.

Further, the fourth pachinko gaming machine shifts when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of operations n related to the B time reduction, rather than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the special time-saving gaming state shifted from the jackpot gaming state. In order to make the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the special time reduction game state longer, secure a time to notify that the special time reduction game state has been entered when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the operation number n related to the B time reduction. can do.

Further, the fourth pachinko gaming machine establishes a special flag for the first change of the special symbol in the special time-saving game state that has been transferred due to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the operation number n related to the B time reduction, and is special. If the flag is established, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is added.

Therefore, the fourth pachinko gaming machine refers to the special time-saving gaming state shifted when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the operation number n related to the B time saving, and the special time-saving gaming state shifted from the jackpot gaming state. Without changing the variation pattern table selection table, it is possible to secure a time for notifying that the special time reduction gaming state has been entered when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the operation number n related to the B time reduction.

The fourth pachinko gaming machine described above can be applied to, for example, a pachislot machine, a slot machine using a gaming ball, an enclosed gaming machine, and a sparrow ball gaming machine, regardless of the pachinko gaming machine.

[5-6. Addendum]
[5-6-1. Appendix 1]
In the conventional gaming machine, if the advance notice effect is monotonous, there is a problem that the player's interest in the game is lowered (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-259639).

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<< First invention >>
It has a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display unit 2163 and a second special symbol display unit 2164) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information.
In a gaming machine that derives a variation result by stopping the variation display of the variable display unit after making the variable display unit variable display.
A normal game state, a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a player more advantageous than the normal game state, and a predetermined game value is given to the player. A game state transition means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of shifting the game state between a plurality of possible special game states (for example, a big hit game state) and a plurality of game states including the main CPU 2201.
An effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of executing an effect according to the game state, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
As the effect state that can be executed in the specific game state, any effect including a first effect state (for example, immediate mode) and a second effect state (for example, charge mode) different from the first effect state. It is possible to move to the state,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display unit fluctuates a predetermined number of times in one of the first effect state and the second effect state, it is possible to shift to the other effect state.
<< Second invention >>
The effect executing means is in the effect state when either the first condition (for example, at the end of a big hit) or the second condition different from the first condition (for example, reaching the B time reduction) is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it is possible to shift to the first effect state.
<< Third invention >>
The effect executing means is
As an effectable state that can be executed in the specific game state, it is possible to shift to a third effect state (for example, an art run mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein when the first condition is satisfied, the effect state can be shifted to either the first effect state or the third effect state.
<< Fourth invention >>
The effect executing means can execute an effect state transition effect indicating to the player that the effect state is changed when the effect state is changed from the first effect state to the second effect state.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the effect state transition effect is an effect that can be continuously executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied.
<< Fifth Invention >>
A hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 2203) capable of storing a predetermined number of hold information for holding the display result derived by the variable display unit, and
A display means (for example, a display device 2007) for displaying an image produced by the effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The effect executing means can execute a series of result display effects showing the fluctuation result of the variable display being executed and the variable result of the predetermined number of reserved information stored in the reserved information storage means.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the series of result display effects is an effect that can be executed in the second effect state.
<< Sixth Invention >>
During the execution of the variation display capable of shifting to the special gaming state, it is possible to execute a special effect for notifying that the variation result indicating the transition to the special gaming state is derived after the variation display is stopped. ,
The special production is
It can be executed when the hold information stored in the hold information storage means includes information that can be transferred to the special gaming state.
The above description is characterized in that it is an effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) that can be executed in one of the first effect state and the second effect state, but is not executed in the other effect state. Gaming machine.
<< Seventh Invention >>
The series of result display effects can execute a plurality of types of predetermined effects having different expectations (for example, effects of a fairy zone, a Shinto zone, a volcano zone, and a god attack zone).
The plurality of types of predetermined effects differ in proportion depending on whether or not the variable display being executed and the reserved information stored in the reserved information storage means include those for shifting to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that any of the predetermined effects can be executed.
<< Eighth Invention >>
The display means has a first area capable of variablely displaying a specific symbol (for example, the first decorative symbol 2501) and a second area capable of variablely displaying a predetermined symbol different from the specific symbol (for example, the second decorative symbol 2502). Including at least the area,
The series of result display effect is an effect suggesting a variation result of the specific symbol displayed in the first area.
When the variation display result of the specific symbol is derived in the first area, the variation display or the stop display of the predetermined symbol for the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is executed in the second area. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.
<< Ninth invention >>
When the series of result display effects are started when the number of the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is less than the predetermined number, the special series result display effect is being executed during the execution of the started series result display effect. When the pending information determined to shift to the gaming state is newly stored,
As the effect result of the series of result display effect, the effect result indicating that the special gaming state is not entered is displayed on the display means.
The above description is characterized in that after the display of the effect result indicating that the special gaming state is not performed, the effect result indicating the transition to the special gaming state can be displayed on the predetermined symbol in the second region. Pachinko machine.
<< 10th invention >>
The effect executing means can execute one of a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, a roulette effect) before executing the predetermined effect.
The plurality of types of specific effects can execute one of the plurality of types of specific effects at different ratios depending on the type of the predetermined effects executed after the execution of the specific effects.
The effect executing means is
A first specific effect execution pattern (for example, an effect pattern of a first effect zone determination effect and a third effect zone determination effect) for executing the predetermined effect after the specific effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the gaming machine includes a second specific effect execution pattern (for example, an effect pattern of a second effect zone determination effect) that executes the predetermined effect without executing the specific effect.
<< 11th invention >>
The effect executing means is
Suggests to the player the degree of expectation as to whether or not the holding information stored in the changing display and the holding information storage means includes the one that satisfies the condition for shifting to the special gaming state. It is possible to perform an expectation suggestion effect,
The expected degree suggestion effect is
The first expectation degree suggestion effect execution pattern in which the predetermined effect is executed after the execution of the expectation degree suggestion effect,
A second expectation suggestion effect in which at least one expectation suggestion effect is newly executed after the execution of the expectation suggestion effect, and the predetermined effect is executed after the newly executed expectation suggestion effect is executed. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the expected degree suggestion effect can be executed by any effect pattern including an execution pattern (for example, an effect pattern of a second effect zone determination effect).
<< 12th invention >>
The effect executing means is
The series of result display effects for the predetermined number of hold information sequentially stored in the variable display and the hold information storage means being executed is set as one set, and a plurality of sets of the series result display effects are performed in the second effect state. The gaming machine described above, characterized by being feasible.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game.

[5-6-2. Appendix 2]
In the conventional gaming machine, since the variable time shortening game and the probability variable game do not operate unless the special game is activated, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player's interest in the game is lowered (for example). JP-A-2010-99253).

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<< First invention >>
It has a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display unit 2163 and a second special symbol display unit 2164) capable of executing a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner.
In a gaming machine that derives a variation result by stopping the variation display of the variable display unit after making the variable display unit variable display.
A gaming state transition means (eg, a gaming state transition means) capable of transitioning a gaming state between a plurality of gaming states including a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Main CPU 2201) and
A variation pattern selection means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of selecting a variation pattern for executing the variation display game based on the variation pattern table, and
An effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of executing an effect, and
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table is
The normal fluctuation pattern table that can be selected in the normal gaming state,
Including at least a specific variation pattern table that can be selected in the specific gaming state,
The specific fluctuation pattern table is based on the fact that at least one of the first condition (for example, at the end of a big hit) or the second condition different from the first condition (for example, reaching the B time reduction) is satisfied. It is a variation pattern table selected by
The effect executing means is
When the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a ceiling time reduction rush effect and / or a hit end time reduction effect) for notifying the transition to the specific game state. A game machine to play.
<< Second invention >>
The specific fluctuation pattern table is
A first specific variation pattern table selected when the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, and
The above description, wherein the variable display unit includes a second specific variation pattern table selected after executing a predetermined number of the variation display games based on the first specific variation pattern table. Game machine.
<< Third invention >>
The effect executing means is
In the normal gaming state,
A first suggestion effect (for example, a full rotation effect) that suggests to the player that the first condition is satisfied, and
It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a ceiling time reduction precursor effect) that suggests to the player that the second condition is satisfied.
Based on the fact that the number of fluctuations of the variable display unit in the normal gaming state has elapsed a predetermined number of times, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be executed in one of the variable display games. The gaming machine described above as a feature.
<< Fourth invention >>
The effect executing means includes a notification effect (for example, a hit end time short rush effect) executed when the first condition is satisfied and a notification effect (for example, a ceiling) executed when the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein at least a part (for example, a video related to a shield acquisition effect and a title image) can be executed in a common effect mode.
<< Fifth Invention >>
When the second condition is satisfied, the effect executing means notifies the notification until a specific condition (for example, the start of change of the second special symbol) on the condition that the variation display game is executed is satisfied. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it does not perform production.
<< Sixth Invention >>
A measuring means for measuring time (for example, sub CPU 2301) is provided.
When the first condition is satisfied, the effect executing means has reached a specific time (for example, a special time-saving gaming state) regardless of the fluctuation state of the variable display unit. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the notification effect can be executed based on the start of the end interval of the jackpot gaming state.
<< Seventh Invention >>
The effect executing means is
When the first condition is satisfied, the notification effect can be executed before shifting to the specific gaming state.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein when the second condition is satisfied, the notification effect can be executed during the first variation display game after shifting to the specific gaming state.
<< Eighth Invention >>
The effect executing means is
When shifting to the specific gaming state based on the satisfaction of the first condition, it is possible to display a warning display (for example, a warning video) that calls the player a predetermined attention.
The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the warning display is not displayed when the state shifts to the specific gaming state based on the satisfaction of the second condition.
<< Ninth invention >>
The first variable display game of the specific gaming state that is transitioned when the first condition is satisfied is the first variable display game of the specific gaming state that is transitioned when the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the rate at which the variable display game with a short variable time is executed is higher than that of the game machine.
<< 10th invention >>
The variation pattern selection means can establish a special flag for the first variation of the variable display unit in the specific gaming state that has been shifted due to the satisfaction of the second condition.
When the special flag is satisfied, the fluctuation display game can be executed in a fluctuation time obtained by adding a predetermined time in addition to the fluctuation time based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means. can be,
The effect executing means is
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the notification effect can be executed during the fluctuation time of the variable display unit added by the fluctuation pattern selection means.
<< 11th invention >>
The fluctuation pattern selection means is
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the special flag is not established for the first change of the variable display unit in the specific gaming state that has been shifted due to the satisfaction of the first condition.
<< 12th invention >>
The special flag can be established when the game state transition means shifts from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, while the gaming state transition means shifts from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is a flag that sometimes does not hold.
<< Thirteenth Invention >>
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the special flag is a flag that is satisfied by a fluctuation that satisfies the second condition.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game.

2007 Display device (display means)
2163 1st special symbol display unit (variable display unit)
2164 2nd special symbol display unit (variable display unit)
2201 Main CPU (game state transition means, variation pattern selection means)
2203 Main RAM (holding information storage means)
2301 Sub CPU (effect execution means)

A conventional gaming machine has been proposed in which a variable time shortening game or a probability variable game is started in a normal game after the special game is completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-99253

However, in such a gaming machine, if the special game is not activated, the variable time shortening game and the probability variable game do not operate, so that the game becomes monotonous and the player's interest in the game is lowered. ..

It has a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display unit 2163 and a second special symbol display unit 2164) capable of executing a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner.
In a gaming machine that derives a variation result by stopping the variation display of the variable display unit after making the variable display unit variable display.
A gaming state transition means (eg, a gaming state transition means) capable of transitioning a gaming state between a plurality of gaming states including a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Main CPU 2201) and
A variation pattern selection means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of selecting a variation pattern for executing the variation display game based on the variation pattern table, and
An effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of executing an effect, and
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table is
The normal fluctuation pattern table that can be selected in the normal gaming state,
Including at least a specific variation pattern table that can be selected in the specific gaming state,
The specific fluctuation pattern table is based on the fact that at least one of the first condition (for example, at the end of a big hit) or the second condition different from the first condition (for example, reaching the B time reduction) is satisfied. It is a variation pattern table selected by
The effect executing means is
When the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a ceiling time reduction rush effect and / or a hit end time reduction effect) for notifying the transition to the specific game state.
When the second condition is satisfied, the notification effect is not executed until a specific condition (for example, the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol) on the condition that the variation display game is executed is satisfied.
When the first condition is satisfied, the notification effect can be executed before shifting to the specific gaming state.
When the second condition is satisfied, the notification effect can be executed after shifting to the specific gaming state.
When shifting to the specific gaming state based on the satisfaction of the first condition, it is possible to display a warning display (for example, a warning video) that calls the player a predetermined attention.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the transition to the specific gaming state is made based on the satisfaction of the second condition, the warning display is not displayed .

Claims (1)

A variable display game execution means that can variablely display a special symbol when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
It is possible to shift when the result of the variable display of the special symbol satisfies a specific condition, and a special gaming state is executed in which a predetermined profit can be given to the player by opening the variable winning device. Game state execution control means and
It is provided with a specific gaming state transition means that can be transitioned after the end of the special gaming state and can execute a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The special design is
The first special symbol that can be variablely displayed when the game medium wins in the first starting port,
Includes a second special symbol that can be variablely displayed when a game medium wins a prize at the second starting port.
The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel.
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.
The right gaming area is provided with a passing gate through which the gaming medium can pass.
The variable winning device can be put into the open state on condition that it has passed through the passing gate.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images